Printronix Printer ThermaLine Series User Manual

ThermaLinet Series Label Printers

IGP/PGL

Programmer's Reference Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ThermaLinet Series Label Printers

IGP/PGL

Programmer's Reference Manual

P/N 136458–001, Rev B

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printronix, Inc. makes no representations or warranties of any kind regarding

this material, including, but not limited to, implied warranties of

merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Printronix, Inc. shall not

be held responsible for errors contained herein or any omissions from this

material or for any damages, whether direct, indirect, incidental or

consequential, in connection with the furnishing, distribution, performance or

use of this material. The information in this manual is subject to change

without notice.

This document contains proprietary information protected by copyright. No

part of this document may be reproduced, copied, translated or incorporated

in any other material in any form or by any means, whether manual, graphic,

electronic, mechanical or otherwise, without the prior written consent of

Printronix, Inc.

17500 Cartwright Road, P.O. Box 19559

Irvine, California 92713

Telephone (714) 863–1900 FAX (714) 660–8682

Technical Support (714) 221–2686

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Trademark Acknowledgments

IBM and IBM PC are registered trademarks of International Business

Machines Corp.

Printronix is a registered trademark of Printronix, Inc.

IGP is a registered trademark of Printronix, Inc.

ThermaLine is a registered trademark of Printronix, Inc.

PSA is a trademark of Printronix, Inc.

Scalable type outlines are licensed from Agfa Corporation. Agfa is a

registered trademark of Agfa–Gevaert, AG. CG, Garth Graphic, Intellifont,

and Type Director are registered trademarks of Agfa Corporation, and

Shannon and CG Triumvirate are trademarks of Agfa Corporation. CG

Bodoni, CG Century Schoolbook, CG Goudy Old Style, CG Melliza,

Microstyle, CG Omega, and CG Palacio are products of Agfa Corporation.

CG Times, based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype

Corporation Plc is a product of Agfa Corporation.

Univers is a registered trademark of Linotype AG and/or its subsidiaries.

Letraset is a registered trademark, and Aachen, Revue and University Roman

are trademarks of Esselte Pendaflex Corporation.

Futura is a registered trademark of Fundición Tipográfica Neufville, S.A.

ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Benguiat, ITC Bookman, ITC Century, ITC

Cheltenham, ITC Clearface, ITC Galliard, ITC Korinna, ITC Lubalin Graph,

ITC Souvenir, ITC Tiepolo, ITC Zapf Chancery, and ITC Zapf Dingbats are

registered trademarks of International Typeface Corporation.

Albertus, Gill Sans, and Times New Roman are registered trademarks, and

Monotype Baskerville is a trademark of The Monotype Corporation Plc,

registered in the U.S. Pat. and TM office and elsewhere.

Hiroshige and Marigold are trademarks of AlphaOmega Typography, Inc.

HP is a registered trademark of Hewlett–Packard Company.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

Introduction

About this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2

How to Locate Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2

Warnings and Special Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3

How the IGP/PGL Operates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5

Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7

Normal Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7

Quiet Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9

Create Form Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9

Create Logo Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11

Execute Form Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11

Configuration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13

Alphanumeric Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17

Incremental Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17

Configuration

Configuring the IPG/PGL with the Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2

The IGP/PGL Emulation Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3

Define CR Code (Carriage Return) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4

Define LF Code (Line Feed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4

Autowrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4

Select SFCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4

Select Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5

Auto Eject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5

Select LPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5

Auto Uppercase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6

Skip Command Prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6

Table of Contents

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Power On IGP/PGL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6

Extended Execute Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6

UPC Descenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7

Host Form Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7

IGP¹⁰⁰Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7

PTX_Setup

PTX_Setup Command Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2

PTX_Setup Command Parameters and Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4

DISK_IO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4

ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5

PTX_Setup Command Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6

Commands

IGP/PGL Command Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3

Special Function Control Character (SFCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3

Semicolon (;) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3

Uppercase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3

Inline Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3

Line Terminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4

Printable Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4

Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5

Command Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5

Form Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5

Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6

Numeric Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6

Comments in Command Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6

Storing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6

Uncompressed and Packed Bits Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7

Character Position.Dot Position (CP.DP) Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7

Data Fields for Alphanumeric and Incremental Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9

Fixed Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9

Table of Contents

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Overlay Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9

Dynamic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9

Incremental Data Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10

Dark Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10

Thermal Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10

Line-Matrix Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10

Alphanumerics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12

Alphanumerics, Incremental Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18

Using Incremental Alphanumeric Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18

Alphanumerics, Incremental: Fixed Data Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–22

Alphanumerics, Incremental: Dynamic Data Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–25

Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–30

Compressed Print (Density) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–33

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–34

Corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–36

Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–39

Delete Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–41

Delete Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–42

Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–43

Duplication, Horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–44

Duplication, Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–46

End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–48

Execute Form Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–49

How to Use the Execute Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–49

Print Formats in the Execute Form Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–50

Execute Form: General Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–51

Execute Form: Dynamic Alphanumeric Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–54

Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–55

Execute Form: Incremental Dynamic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–56

Supplying Dynamic Data for Incremental Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–57

Execute Form: Overlay Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–59

Expanded Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–60

Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–61

Table of Contents

iii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Form Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–64

Ignore Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–65

Line Spacing, Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–66

Lines, Horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–67

Lines, Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–69

Listen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–71

Logo Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–72

Logo Mode, Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–74

Normal Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–77

Page Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–78

Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–79

PCX Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–81

Print File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–83

Quiet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–84

Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–85

Reverse Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–86

Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–88

Select Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–90

Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–91

TIFF Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–92

Bar Codes

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2

User–Defined Variable Bar Code Ratios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4

PDF Character Sizes [PDF [;LOC] [;FONT] (T)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–16

Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–17

Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–24

Codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–31

Code 128B and Code 128C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–38

Code UCC–128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–47

EAN 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–53

EAN 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–60

Table of Contents

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–67

Interleaved 2/5 (I–2/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–74

MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–81

PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–88

POSTNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–94

UPC–A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–100

UPC–E and UPC–E0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–107

Incremental Bar Code Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–116

Incrementing Bar Code Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–117

Incremental Bar Code Fixed Data Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–120

Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–123

Duplicating Incremental Bar Code Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–124

Form Examples and Exercises

Form Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2

Example: Using the Setup Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5

Example: Dynamic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5

Example: Auto Increment Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–14

Form Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–19

Logo Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–32

Form Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–37

Directory Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–47

Delete Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–48

Solving Program Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–49

Multinational Character Sets

About the Multinational Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2

Character Sets Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2

Character Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3

Making Character Substitutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3

OCR Character Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6

Accessing Characters and Character Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7

Table of Contents

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Data Bit 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7

Power–Up Character Set Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7

User–Defined Set Command (USET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8

Character Set Selection Command (ISET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10

Multinational Character Set Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11

Error Codes

The Purpose of Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–2

Horizontal Line Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–3

Vertical Line Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–4

Box Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–5

Corner Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–6

Alpha Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–8

Logo Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–10

Create Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–12

Execute Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–14

Miscellaneous Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–16

Bar Code Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–18

Reverse Print Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–21

Incremental Fields Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–22

Multinational Character Set Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–23

Font Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–24

Appendices

Standard ASCII Character Set

Grid Programs and Samples

Page Boundaries

Typefaces

Index

Table of Contents

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Introduction

Chapter Contents

About this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2

How to Locate Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2

Warnings and Special Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3

How the IGP/PGL Operates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5

Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7

Normal Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7

Quiet Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9

Create Form Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9

Create Logo Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11

Execute Form Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11

Configuration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13

Alphanumeric Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17

Incremental Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17

Introduction

1–1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

About this Manual

This manual explains how to use the IGP /PGL (Intelligent Graphics

Printing/Printronix Graphics Language). Use this manual in conjunction

with your printer Setup Guide for complete printer–IGP/PGL compatibility.

How to Locate Information

You can locate information three ways:

•

Use the Table of Contents at the front of the manual.

Use the Chapter Contents list on the first page of each chapter.

Use the alphabetical Index at the back of the manual.

Warnings and Special Information

Information requiring special attention is highlighted under special headings.

Always read and comply with this information. The heading reveals the

nature of the information:

WARNING

WARNING tells you of conditions that could cause you physical harm.

CAUTION

CAUTION tells you of conditions that could damage the printer,

IGP/PGL, or related equipment.

IMPORTANT

IMPORTANT gives you information vital to proper IGP/PGL operation.

NOTE: Provides information affecting IGP/PGL operation considered

important enough to emphasize.

1–2

Introduction

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Features

IGP/PGL is the Intelligent Graphics Printing firmware for the Printronix

Graphics Language, which is designed for the new Printronix PSAt line of

line-matrix, laser and thermal printers. The IGP/PGL provides on–line forms,

bar codes, and many alphanumeric text–generation capabilities and is

compatible with earlier versions of Printronix IGP protocol and

programming. IGP/PGL graphics processing features are detailed below.

NOTE: The ThermaLinet Series printers are not floppy disk-based

printers. As a result, reference to disk drive ‘A’ implies the internal

SRAM, disk drive ‘B’ corresponds to the top external memory

module slot, and drive ‘C’ corresponds to the bottom memory

module slot. Note also that drive ‘C‘ does not exist for the T3204

model.

On–Line Form and Label Generation makes it easy to create forms or

labels with a “preprinted” look for each application. IGP/PGL programs

control all graphic functions, dramatically reducing host computer

programming and processing time.

Graphic capabilities include boxes, vertical and horizontal lines with

user–selectable thickness, logos, and special alphanumeric print features.

Forms and graphic designs can be duplicated horizontally and vertically.

Alphanumeric data can appear as prepositioned “fixed” information (entered

when the form is created), can be overlayed onto the form (positioned in a

specific location after the form is created), or may be dynamically merged

with the form.

Selectable Bar Codes provides you with the appropriate bar code for your

application using standard wide–to–narrow ratios. A wide selection of bar

codes are available: Code 39, Interleaved 2 of 5, UPC–A, UPC–E, MSI A

through D, Code 128 Subset B and C, Code 93, EAN 8, EAN 13, POSTNET,

FIM, and PDF–417. UPC and EAN bar codes can also specify add–on data.

Expanded and Compressed Character Print attract attention where

needed. Alphanumeric height and width are controlled independently for a

wide range of character sizes up to 113 times the standard character size (up

to 9.9 inches wide and tall). Compressed print sizes of 10 to 30 characters per

inch (cpi) are available.

Introduction

1–3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Rotated Alphanumerics permit new concepts in form design. Normal,

expanded, and compressed character strings can be rotated 90 degrees

clockwise or counterclockwise, or they can be printed upside down.

Logos are easily created using alphanumeric commands and add a variety of

print and shading features for a “customized” appearance to forms, reports,

and labels. You can define the format of the logo using TIFF files and PCX

raster data as well as the standard IGP/PGL dots.

Reversed Print permits highlighting and contrasting by printing white

characters on a dark background.

Automatic Increment/Decrement Capability allows batch form

processing. You can identify individual numeric and bar code data fields,

which includes automatic increment or decrement functions.

The following list summarizes the new features included in the current

release:

•

Inline Commands allows commands to appear anywhere within a line.

This enables the FONT command to control text attributes for a text

line. It also permits commands to be packed into a single text line to

maintain line counting when using an IBM system.

TIFF and PCX Raster Data File Support allowing two of the four

TIFF file formats (uncompressed and packed bits compression formats)

and both of the PCX raster data file formats (compressed and

uncompressed).

•

Additional Bar Codes including Code 93, an industrial bar code, and

Codabar, a medical and package tracking bar code.

Host Control of PSA Resources through PTX SETUP command,

which manages those options that are common between printer

emulations.

1–4

Introduction

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

How the IGP/PGL Operates

IGP/PGL is an emulation that allows you to print sophisticated graphics and

bar codes.

Depending on what the printer is doing, it is always in a particular mode,

which is transparent to the user. These modes are discussed in more detail in

Chapter 2.

When the printer is receiving text or printing text, it is in Normal mode. Any

time the printer is on and is not processing IGP/PGL commands, it is in

Normal mode.

When a Create Form command is issued, the printer moves from the Normal

mode to the Create Form mode.

During this phase, the user sends text, images, and bar code data to the

IGP/PGL. All of this data is stored in memory. An End statement terminates

the IGP/PGL data string. The printer returns to Normal mode.

You can create as many forms as you wish and store them on your host or in

external printer memory.

All forms have filenames. You may want to print the form, label it, and store

it for future reference. Or, you can devise another method for easy retrieval.

These forms can then be downloaded from your host to the printer.

When you Execute a form, you can print it as many times as you wish. This

saves you time from downloading the form each time you want to print it.

Introduction

1–5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printer Operating Mode

What It Means

Printer receives data

and prints text/graphics.

Normal Mode

Create Form Mode

Execute Form Mode

Normal Mode

You send IGP commands

to the printer.

Printer prints the

form designed in

Create Form mode.

Printer returns

to Normal mode.

Figure 1–1. IPG/PGL Modes

1–6

Introduction

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Modes of Operation

The IGP/PGL has six modes of operation that use specific command

sequences to control the IGP/PGL.

•

In the Normal mode, the printer waits for a Special Function Control

Code (SFCC) in order to perform IGP/PGL functions.

•

In Quiet mode all IGP/PGL commands are ignored.

In the Create Logo and Create Form modes, the printer produces

graphics such as forms, logos, bar codes, and alphanumeric data.

•

The Execute mode is the IGP/PGL printing mode, which controls when

the actual printing of the bar codes and graphics will occur.

The Configuration mode allows you to select specific IGP/PGL

operations for running IGP/PGL files on your printer.

Normal Mode

Normal mode commands print data in a line printer format until a Special

Function Control Character (SFCC) is detected.

Commands accessible in the Normal mode are summarized in Table 1–1 and

fully described on the referenced pages. Some Normal mode commands can

also be used in other modes: Compressed Print, Expand, Ignore, Select

Format, and Vertical Line Spacing, which are Normal mode commands, can

also be used in the Execute Form mode; the Multinational Character Set

command can be used in the Normal or Create modes. Carriage Return, Form

Feed, Line Feed, EVFU commands, and Paper Slew commands also operate

in the Normal mode.

NOTE: All IGP/PGL commands must be entered in UPPERCASE, and each

command line must be followed immediately by a line feed (or

carriage return with line feed terminator) or a paper motion

command.

Introduction

1–7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 1–1. Normal Mode Commands

Command

Compressed Print

Configuration

Create

Mnemonic

Description

Defines the horizontal print density in characters per inch (cpi).

Reconfigures IGP/PGL parameters.

Page #

4–33

DENSITY

CONFIG

CREATE

4–34

Places the IGP/PGL in the Create Form mode where all the Create Form mode

commands are available to design form elements.

4–39

Create Logo

LOGO

Places the IGP/PGL in the Create Logo mode, where logos can be defined using

the appropriate dot placements.

4–74

Delete Form

Delete Logo

DIRECTORY

The Directory command; enter DIRECTORY.

Comments As many forms and logos as printer memory allows may be stored in

IGP/PGL memory. If the memory is full, the form will not print; available

space in the memory must be at least the size of the form being executed.

For more information, refer to the Directory Example on page 6–47.

Commands

4–43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Duplication, Horizontal

Purpose

Defines both the number of times form elements are duplicated horizontally

and the spacing between each duplication.

Mode

CREATE

Format

HDUP; dup#; offset#

elements to be duplicated

HDUP;OFF

HDUP

The Horizontal Duplication command; enter HDUP.

dup#

Specifies the duplication number, which is the number

of times the entered form element(s) will repeat

horizontally. Enter a value ranging from 1 to 255.

offset#

Specifies the horizontal offset to establish the

horizontal spacing between each duplication of the

form element(s) specified in the body of the command.

Enter a value in terms of dot or character columns

based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or use the

CP.DP format (page 4–7). The offset is from starting

column to starting column.

HDUP;OFF

Terminates the Horizontal Duplication command; enter

HDUP;OFF. If not entered, the IGP/PGL expects

another form element to be defined for duplication. A

single HDUP command can define different types of

elements for duplication.

4–44

Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

The following example is a horizontal duplication of a series of vertical

lines. To illustrate positioning, starting row and column are indicated on the

example but do not necessarily reflect actual location on the page.

HDUP;14;4

VERT

(14 duplications with 4–character column spacing)

(Command to duplicate horizontally)

(Note CP.DP format: 59.6)

1;10;59;59.6

1;10.3;58.9;59.9

1;11;58.6;60

1;11.3;58.3;60.3

1;12;58;60.6

1;12.3;58.3;60.3

1;13;58.6;60

1;13.3;58.9;59.9

STOP

(Stops the command to duplicate element)

(Terminates the horizontal duplication)

HDUP;OFF

COLUMN 10

COLUMN 11

COLUMN 12

COLUMN 13

ROW 58

DUPLICATING THE SET HORIZONTALLY 14 TIMES

ROW 60.6

COLUMN 13.3

COLUMN 12.3

COLUMN 11.3

COLUMN 10.3

hdup.ex

Commands

4–45

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Duplication, Vertical

Purpose

Defines both the number of times elements are duplicated vertically and the

spacing between each duplication.

Mode

CREATE

Format

VDUP; dup#; offset#

elements to be duplicated

VDUP;OFF

VDUP

The Vertical Duplication command; enter VDUP.

dup#

Specifies the duplication number – the number of times

the entered form element(s) will repeat vertically. Enter

a value ranging from 1 to 255.

offset#

Specifies the vertical offset to establish the vertical

spacing between each duplication of the form

element(s) specified in the body of the command.

Enter a value in terms of dot or character columns

based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or use the

CP.DP format (page 4–7). The offset is from starting

row to starting row.

VDUP;OFF

Terminates the Vertical Duplication command; enter

VDUP;OFF. If not entered, the IGP/PGL expects

another form element to be defined for duplication. A

single VDUP command can define different types of

elements for duplication.

4–46

Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

The following example is a vertical duplication of one horizontal line. The

line is duplicated three times. To illustrate positioning, the starting row and

column are indicated on the example but do not necessarily reflect actual

location on the page.

VDUP;3;2

HORZ

(3 duplications with 2–character row spacing)

(Command to duplicate vertically)

1;52;15;65

STOP

(Stops the command to duplicate element)

(Terminates the vertical duplication)

VDUP;OFF

COLUMN 15

COLUMN 65

ROW 52

ROW 54

ROW 56

vdup.ex

Commands

4–47

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

End

Purpose

Terminates the current mode of operation and must be used before entering

a new mode command (EXECUTE, LOGO, NORMAL, or even CREATE).

Mode

CREATE

END

Format

Comments After the End command is received, the IGP/PGL flushes program errors,

stores the error–free portions of the form program just completed, and then

returns to the Normal mode. If the debug slash (/) is included in the Create

command, the program prints with any corresponding error messages.

4–48

Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Execute Form Mode

How to Use the Execute Command

Forms are printed in the Execute Form mode. In addition to printing the form

in the Execute Form mode, variable data can also be entered onto the form

“dynamically” during the Execute Form mode. This dynamic data input

during the Execute Form mode includes page numbers, alphanumeric data

fields, and bar code data fields. Pagination, described on page 4–78, is

performed in the Execute Form mode. Dynamic alphanumeric and bar code

data require additional commands within the Execute Form mode.

The fastest method for repeated forms printing is to use the form feed

character. Rather than sending a series of Execute/Normal commands, which

slows the process by performing an open—print—close form sequence, the

form feed character instructs the IGP/PGL to start a new page with new

dynamic and overlay data using the existing Execute commands for the form.

The Dynamic Data—Overlay Data—Form Feed Character sequence can be

repeated indefinitely while maintaining the optimum print speed within the

original Execute command.

Remember, when a form count is not specified, a single line spacing (or a

line containing overlay data) must always separate an EXECUTE command

from a NORMAL command.

Commands

4–49

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To Execute Forms Rapidly

In order to save reloading time, the PGL remembers the last form executed.

However, a form must be loaded if it was not the last form executed, if it was

used with a CREATE command since the last EXECUTE, or if any logo has

been created.

Use the SETUP command to define forms at power up and execute them

from internal memory rather than from external memory.

When the form to be executed is not found in internal memory, the default

external memory module is automatically searched. If the form is found, it is

loaded into internal memory and execution resumes; otherwise, the “FORM

NOT FOUND” error is printed.

NOTE: If an older application uses the disk parameter for the execute

command, it is ignored and the above steps are taken.

Print Formats in the Execute Form Mode

The Execute Form mode has two print formats. The standard execute

command format, shown below, is used for executing nonincremental data

and incremental fixed data. An incremental Execute command format,

containing two additional parameters, is used for executing incremental

dynamic data and is discussed on page 4–56.

During the Execute Form mode, the IGP/PGL responds to regular print

format commands such as 8 lpi, and elongated characters. Some commands

can be used in other modes in addition to the Execute Form mode. For

example, Compressed Print, Expanded Print, Execute, Ignore, Select Format,

and Vertical Line Spacing, which are also Normal mode commands, can be

used in the Execute or Create Form modes. The IGP/PGL alternate character

set can also be used in the Execute Form mode.

4–50

Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Execute Form: General Format

Purpose

Mode

Prints forms created in the CREATE mode.

NORMAL

Format

(cc)EXECUTE ;formname [;PAGEn] [;FC] [;ICNTn] [;IRSTn]

[(cc)AFn; (D)ASCII text(D)]

[(cc)BFn; (D)data(D)]

[(cc)IAFn; [idir] STEPMASK; [RPTn;] [RSTn;] (D)STARTDATA(D)]

[(cc)IBFn; [idir] STEPMASK; [RPTn;] [RSTn;] (D)STARTDATA(D)]

[Overlay Data]

[Form Feed character]

(cc)NORMAL

(cc)

The Special Function Control Character.

EXECUTE

formname

The Execute Form command; enter EXECUTE.

Identifies a previously defined form by name. Enter the

form name exactly as used when created.

PAGE n

The optional Pagination command; enter PAGE and

replace n with the decimal number of the starting page

in a sequence of multiple pages. The number may be

eight digits long and range between 0 and 99999999.

The next page after 99999999 is 0. Leave a blank

space between the PAGE command and the n value.

The page number will print on the form in the location

defined by the Page Number command in the Create

Form mode. If the location of the pagination field was

not specified in the Create Form mode, the page field

is printed in the upper left corner of the form.

Commands

4–51

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The optional form count parameter specifies the

number of copies of the form to print. Enter the

appropriate number.

When the last page prints, the IGP/PGL returns to the

Normal mode automatically. Do not use the form count

parameter if dynamic data (AFn and BFn parameters),

incremental data (ICNT or IRST parameters), overlay

data, or EVFU data are used in the Execute command.

ICNTn

IRSTn

The optional incremental form count. Enter ICNT and

the Incremental value as described in the Execute

Incremental Dynamic Data command described on

page 4–56.

The optional incremental reset count parameter. Enter

IRST and the reset value as described in the Execute

Incremental Dynamic Data command described on

page 4–56.

AFn;(D)ASCII text(D)

The Execute Dynamic Alphanumeric Data command.

Enter the dynamic alphanumeric data during the

Execute Form mode as described in “Execute Form:

Dynamic Alphanumeric Data” on page 4–54.

BFn ;(D)data(D) The Execute Dynamic Bar Code Data command. Enter

the dynamic bar code data during the Execute Form

mode as described in “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar

Code Data” on page 4–55.

(cc)IAFn;[idir] STEPMASK;[RPTn;] [RSTn;] (D)STARTDATA(D)

The Execute Incremental Dynamic Alphanumeric Data

command. Supply the data as described on page 4–57.

(cc)IBFn; [idir] STEPMASK; [RPTn;] [RSTn;](D)STARTDATA(D)

The Execute Incremental Dynamic Bar Code Data

command. Supply the data as described on page 4–57.

4–52

Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Overlay Data

Overlay data can be entered during the Execute Form

mode. (The words “Overlay Data” are not part of the

Execute command. They are shown in the command

sequence to indicate that actual overlay data can be

entered following the Execute command.) Refer to

“Execute Form: Overlay Data” on page 4–59.

Form Feed Character

Optional command instructing the IGP/PGL to start a

new page with new EVFU, dynamic, and overlay data

using the existing Execute commands for the current

form. Using this EVFU Data—Dynamic Data and

Overlay Data—Form Feed Character sequence can be

repeated indefinitely, while maintaining the optimum

print speed, within the original Execute command.

(cc)NORMAL

The Normal mode command. If the form count

parameter was not used in the Execute command, enter

the SFCC and NORMAL to return the IGP/PGL to the

Normal mode.

The Normal mode command is input following all

other Execute commands to enter variable data. (Refer

to the following sections.) Input a line terminator to

leave a blank line before entering the Normal

command.

Commands

4–53

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Execute Form: Dynamic Alphanumeric Data

Purpose

Incorporates the dynamic alphanumeric data into a previously identified

location on a form.

Mode

EXECUTE

Format

(cc)AFn; (D)ASCII text(D)

AFn

Indicates a dynamic alphanumeric field (AF) and its

data (n). Enter AF and replace n with the number of

the data field corresponding to the number used to

identify the field when it was defined with the

Alphanumeric command in the Create Form mode.

The printable character identifying the start and finish

of the alphanumeric data. Enter any printable character

other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a character used

within the data. The same character must be used at

both ends of the data field but will not be printed with

the data.

ASCII text

The group of ASCII characters (the alphanumeric

string) to print. Enter any of the standard ASCII

printable characters (except the character used as

delimiters described in the D parameter). The data

appears on the form at the location identified by n.

NOTE:

Commands can appear anywhere in the overlay text with PGL.

Comments The location for the Dynamic alphanumeric data must have been previously

identified using the AFn;L parameters of the alphanumerics command in

the Create Form mode. Inputting individual commands enters the new data

into the identified location each time the form is printed.

You can repeat the (cc)AFn;(D)ASCII text(D) sequence to complete as

many data fields as you defined on the form in the Create Form mode. You

can also combine the Execute Dynamic Bar Code Data command in the

same Execute command sequence. Each “page” of dynamic data (the

dynamic fields, data, and overlay data) for the form must be separated from

the next page of new dynamic data by a form feed.

4–54

Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code Data

Purpose

Incorporates the dynamic bar code data into a previously identified location

on a form.

Mode

EXECUTE

Format

(cc)BFn; (D)data field(D)

BFn

Indicates a dynamic bar code field (BF) and its data

(n). Enter BF and replace n with the number of the

data field corresponding to the number used to identify

the field when it was defined with the bar code

command during the Create Form mode.

The printable character (quotation marks for example)

identifying the start and finish of the bar code data.

Enter any printable character other than a slash (/), the

SFCC, or a character used within the data. The same

character must be used at both ends of the data field

but will not be printed with the data.

data field

Enter the characters for the bar code data. The type of

characters allowed in the data varies with the type of

bar code. Refer to the data field descriptions for the

selected bar code types.

NOTE:

Commands can appear anywhere in the overlay text with PGL.

Comments The bar code location must have been previously identified using the

BFn;L or BFn parameters of a bar code command in the Create Form

mode. Then use the appropriate bar code command to enter the bar code

data in that location. Inputting individual commands enters new bar code

data into the identified location each time the form is printed.

You can repeat the (cc)BFn;(D)data field(D) sequence to complete as many

bar code data fields as were defined on the form in the Create Form mode.

You can also combine the Execute Dynamic Alphanumeric Data command

in the same Execute command sequence. Each “page” of dynamic data (the

dynamic fields, data, and overlay data) for the form must be separated from

the next page of new dynamic data by a form feed.

Commands

4–55

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Execute Form: Incremental Dynamic Data

Purpose

Incorporates incremental/decremental capability to dynamic alphanumeric

or bar code data supplied as a part of the Execute Form mode.

Mode

NORMAL

NOTE:

In the command below, incremental Execute parameters are shown in

boldface type; standard Execute command parameters are shown in italics.

The general Execute format is shown on page 4–51.

Format

(cc)EXECUTE; formname [;PAGE n] [;FC] [;ICNTn] [;IRSTn]

ICNTn

IRSTn

Identifies the incremental form count to specify the

number of forms to generate with the incremental

fields automatically updated. Enter ICNT and replace

n with a value ranging from 1 to 65,535 to specify the

number of forms.

The optional incremental reset count parameter to

specify the number of forms to generate before

resetting all incremental fields to their starting values.

The reset count parameter is useful in dividing the total

number of forms generated into multiple groups of

identical copies. To use this parameter, enter IRST and

replace n with a value ranging from 1 to 65,535 to

specify the reset count (how many forms generated

before resetting the incremental fields). If the reset

count value is equal to or greater than the incremental

count value, the reset will never occur.

Example

The following forms were generated from ICNT6, IRST2. (To duplicate

incremental fields within a form, refer to page 4–25.)

form1

form2

form3

form4

form5

form6 = ICNT6

4–56

Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Supplying Dynamic Data for Incremental Fields

Incremental dynamic data fields are created in the Create Form mode using

the incremental alphanumeric or bar code commands. The incremental

dynamic data itself is supplied during the Execute Form mode at the top of

the form prior to any overlay data. The incremental dynamic data (either

alphanumeric or bar code data) can be changed with each new batch of

forms. Incremental dynamic data fields specified in the Create Form mode

will not appear on the form if corresponding incremental dynamic data is not

supplied in the Execute Form mode.

Format

For incremental dynamic alphanumeric data:

(cc)IAFn; [idir] STEPMASK; [RPTn;] [RSTn;] (D)STARTDATA(D)

For incremental dynamic bar code data:

(cc)IBFn; [idir] STEPMASK; [RPTn;] [RSTn;] (D)STARTDATA(D)

(cc)

IAF

The Special Function Control Character.

Identifies the command as incremental alphanumeric

dynamic data; enter IAF.

IBF

Identifies the command as incremental bar code

dynamic data; enter IBF.

Identifies the field number of the dynamic data field as

entered in the Create Form mode. Replace n with the

number used to identify the field when it was defined.

idir

The optional increment direction parameter to specify

an increase or decrease of the data. Enter a plus sign

(+) or leave the field blank to increment (the default).

Enter a minus sign (–) to decrement.

STEPMASK

Defines the increment amount (step), the number of

character positions in the data field, and provides a

mask to control the increment function on specific

parts of the data. Refer to “Incremental Bar Code

Fields” on page 5–116 or “Alphanumerics, Incremental

Fields” on page 4–18 for complete information on

STEPMASK parameter values.

Commands

4–57

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RPTn

The optional incremental repeat count parameter to

specify the number of times a particular field value is

repeated before it is incremented. A repeated field

value is useful when printing multiple rows/columns of

identical labels before incrementing to the next value.

To use the repeat count parameter, enter RPT and

replace n with a numeric value ranging from 1 to

65,535 to specify the repeat count. The default repeat

count parameter is 1, which will increment the field

value each time it is printed.

RSTn

The optional incremental reset count parameter to

specify the number of times an incremented field is

printed (on one or more forms) before it is reset to the

starting value. A reset count is useful when printing a

hierarchy of fields where a low–level field generates a

sequence of numbers, is reset, and the next higher field

level is incremented (such as in a unit/box/carton

application).

To use the reset count parameter, enter RST and

replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 65,535 to

specify the reset count. The default reset count value

is 0.

STARTDATA

Defines the starting value of the incrementing field.

The maximum amount of STARTDATA characters

must be equal to or less than the number of characters

in the STEPMASK field. If the number of data

characters in dynamic alphanumeric data commands is

less than the number used in STEPMASK, the data

will print right justified with preceding spaces.

(Leading spaces are not provided for bar code data.)

For dynamic bar code data, the type of characters

allowed for incrementing fields is based on the type of

bar code. Refer to the individual bar code descriptions

in the “Bar Codes” chapter for information on valid

type and quantity of data characters. The STARTDATA

must be enclosed within standard printable character

delimiters just as a standard data field is enclosed

within delimiters.

4–58

Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Execute Form: Overlay Data

Overlay data is variable alphanumeric data entered onto a predefined form.

The form is completed by positioning the data in the exact location it will

appear on the form when printed. The data is placed horizontally using tabs

and spaces, and vertically using line feeds, form feeds, and the EVFU.

For example, if the serial number field on the form begins at character row

22, and column 14, enter 22 line feeds, space over 14 columns, and input

serial number overlay data. An entire form can be completed with a page of

overlay data in this manner. Overlay data at the end of a form is printed on a

new form until all overlay data is used. Then, to advance to the next form,

use a form feed.

The IGP/PGL Electronic Vertical Format Unit can be used to control vertical

spacing of the overlay data. In place of line feed commands input

individually, the EVFU can be programmed (during the Execute Form mode)

to slew the overlay data page to the predetermined lines with a single

command.

NOTE: When using the PGL, the Dynamic Data command and Overlay

IGP/PGL commands may be issued on the same line as the overlay

text to synchronize the printer with systems that count lines (e.g.,

IBM). See the IGP/PGL command standard for inline command

format on page 4–3.

Commands

4–59

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Expanded Print

Purpose

Mode

Selects font sizes other than the default font.

NORMAL, EXECUTE

Format

(cc)EXPAND; VE; HE

(cc)

The Special Function Control Character.

EXPAND

The Expanded Print command; enter EXPAND.

Specifies the vertical expansion factor; enter a value

ranging from 0 to 139.

Specifies the horizontal expansion factor; enter a value

ranging from 0 to 139. Both VE and HE parameters

must be zero or non–zero. One expansion value cannot

be specified as 0 if the other is not. A VE or HE setting

of 1 expands the appropriate plane but produces

single–size characters. A VE and HE setting of 0

produces standard–size characters.

Comments The Expanded Print command uses the 0.10–inch, 10 cpi Gothic typeface

as the default base value from which alphanumeric characters are

expanded. (Refer to the Font command on page 4–61 for more information

about available typefaces and styles.)

The character height can be up to a maximum of 13.9 inches, which means

if a page is 13.9 inches high, you can print a character that fills the entire

height of the page.

After an Expanded Print command is entered, all subsequent alphanumerics

print at the specified expansion until another Expanded Print command, a

Normal mode command, or a Reset command is entered. An Expanded

Print command with VE and HE set to 0 selects standard character printing.

Example

The following command results in character printing at 25 times its vertical

and 40 times its horizontal size.

~EXPAND;25;40

4–60

Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Font

Purpose

Selects typefaces other than the default Gothic font.

NORMAL, CREATE, EXECUTE

Mode

Format

(cc)FONT [;FACE #] [;BOLD #] [;SLANT #] [;SYMSET #] [;POINT #]

NOTE:

The font is activated according to the changed options upon receipt of the

font command.

(cc)

The Special Function Control Character. (If you are

using the Font command in the CREATE mode, do not

enter the SFCC.)

FONT

The Font command; enter FONT.

FACE #

Identifies the specific typeface. Enter FACE, a space,

and the 5 digit typeface number representing the

selected typeface.

93952 = Courier Bold

93779 = Letter Gothic Bold

Other font numbers correspond to optional typefaces.

Refer to the font instructions (that come packaged with

the optional font external memory modules) for

typeface numbers.

See Appendix D.

Do not use this command to select OCR–A and

OCR–B. Instead, use either the Cn parameter in the

Alphanumerics command or use the Compressed Print

Density command.

NOTE: The font # range 1–99 is reserved for HP LaserJet II downloadable

fonts (refer to page 3–5, in Chapter 3).

Commands

4–61

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BOLD #

SLANT #

Selects a bold attribute. Enter BOLD, a space, and ON

or 1 to turn bold on, or OFF or 0 for no bold attribute.

Selects a slanting factor. (Slant is similar to italic, but

also offers a backward slant.) Enter SLANT, a space,

and RIGHT or 1 for a typical italic slant, LEFT or –1

for a backward slant, or OFF or 0 for no slant attribute.

SYMSET #

POINT #

Selects a font symbol set other than the default ASCII

symbol set. Enter SYMSET, a space, and a value

ranging from 0 to 31 representing the symbol set as

identified in Table 7–1 on page 7–2 in the

“Multinational Character Sets” chapter.

Selects the point size for the current typeface. Enter

POINT, a space, and a point size ranging from 4 to

999. Point sizes are available in quarter–point

increments. Horizontal pitch is automatically adjusted

based on the point size selected.

The point parameter cannot be used when in CREATE

mode. Use the point parameter of the alpha command.

NOTE:

The fonts available are the standard font (#93779) and (#93952); OCR–A

(#90993); and OCR–B (#91409). Other type face numbers will correspond

to the CG Triumvirate font. CG Triumvirate is the proportional font and is

available in the following point sizes.

Comments Font parameters in Normal and Execute modes do not affect the fonts that

have already been established and saved on a form.

Font commands issued in the Create mode affect only the current form

being created and not any of the fonts on other forms or for Execute or

Normal mode text.

You can use any or all Font parameters, listed in any order, in a single Font

command. (Do not list font parameters on separate lines.) Parameters and

symbol sets not specified retain the previously selected value. Parameters

incorrectly specified retain the previously selected value.

4–62

Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

All Font command parameters are reset to default values upon receiving a

NORMAL, RESET, CONFIG;RESET, or new CREATE command.

Multiple font commands within a single form will save the last font

command parameters specified. Symbol sets can also be selected using the

ISET or USET commands. (Refer to the “Multinational Character Sets”

chapter.)

Fonts in the HP LaserJet II format may also be downloaded to the printer.

They may be downloaded into either the SRAM or FLASH memory

modules, and then will be available permanently (at least as long as the

FLASH or SRAM module is installed). Note that these fonts are

proportional fonts. They may be selected using the FONT command;

however, the POINT size, BOLD, ITALIC and SYMSET parameters are

ignored.

Use the PTX_SETUP command to download a font. Refer to Chapter 3 in

this manual for details.

The downloaded fonts are selected in the same manner as are the other

expansion fonts, i.e., with the FONT command. The font number given in

the download command will be the same number used in the FONT

command to select it.

Example

The following command selects the Letter Gothic font (#93779) with a

right slant. This font will continue to print until another Font command, a

Normal mode command, or a Reset command is entered.

~FONT;FACE 93779

Commands

4–63

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Form Length

Purpose

Mode

Sets the length of the form to a specific number of lines at 6 or 8 lpi.

CREATE

Format

LFORM6; n or LFORM8; n

LFORM6

LFORM8

The Form Length command for 6 lpi forms; enter

LFORM6.

The Form Length command for 8 lpi forms; enter

LFORM8.

Specifies the forms length in total number of lines

allowed per form. The range depends on the paper size

used and the top/bottom margin setting. An error

message will result if the maximum line values are

exceeded.

NOTE:

This command affects only printed text inside of IGP/PGL forms, not the

printer lpi. The LFORM8 command considers a line as 9 dot rows; the

LFORM6 command considers a line as 12 dot rows. The 9 and 12 dot rows

per line matches the dot rows of the printer in the DP mode if set to 8 or 6

lpi, respectively.

Example

NOTE:

The following example establishes a forms length of 8 inches (48 lines at 6

lpi):

LFORM6;48

Additional information about page boundaries can be found in Appendix C.

4–64

Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Ignore Sequence

Purpose

Enables the IGP/PGL to ignore all characters after the Ignore Sequence On

(IGON) command is entered. All characters are ignored until the Ignore

Sequence Off (IGOFF) command is entered.

Mode

NORMAL, CREATE, or EXECUTE

(cc)IGON or (cc)IGOFF

Format

NOTE:

A line terminator is not required in the Ignore Sequence.

(cc)

The Special Function Control Character.

Ignore Sequence On command; enter IGON.

Exits Ignore Sequence

IGON

IGOFF

Comments IGON and IGOFF can also be used anywhere in the data stream.

NOTE: Commands in PTX_SETUP and control characters used to

download TIFF and PCX logos are not ignored.

Commands

4–65

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Line Spacing

Purpose

Mode

Defines the lines per inch (lpi) printing format.

NORMAL, EXECUTE

Format

(cc)LPI; n

(cc)

LPI

The Special Function Control Character.

The Vertical Line Spacing command; enter LPI.

Selects the line spacing in lpi; enter any integer value

from 1 to 10.

Comments Standard line spacing is 6 lpi. After a Vertical Line Spacing command is

entered, all subsequent alphanumerics print at the specified lpi until another

Vertical Line Spacing command, a Normal mode command, or a Reset

command is entered.

Example

The following command selects 9 lpi printing format until another Line

Spacing command, a Normal mode command, or a Reset command is

entered.

~LPI;9

4–66

Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Lines, Horizontal

Purpose

Mode

Defines horizontal lines.

CREATE

Format

HORZ

LT; R; SC; EC

STOP

HORZ

The Horizontal Line command; enter HORZ.

Defines the line thickness, measured in 1/72” dots.

Enter a value of 1 or greater. Horizontal line thickness

expands downward from the given row.

Defines the row to draw the horizontal line. Enter a

value ranging from row 1 through one less than the

length of the form. Character row or dot row is

specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or

use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).

Defines the starting column of the horizontal line.

Enter a value ranging from column 1 through one less

than the width of the form. Character column or dot

column is specified based on the Scale command (page

4–88), or use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).

Defines the ending column of the horizontal line. Enter

a value ranging from column 2 through the last column

of the form. The ending column must be greater than

the starting column. Character column or dot column is

specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or

use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).

STOP

Stop indicates the end of the HORZ command; enter

STOP. If not entered, the IGP/PGL will expect another

set of Horizontal Line command parameters.

Commands

4–67

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

The following example specifies 2 horizontal lines. The first line uses the

character row in the R parameter, and the second line uses CP.DP format.

To illustrate positioning, the starting row and column are indicated on the

example but do not necessarily reflect actual location on the page.

HORZ

1;60;15;65

1;60.5;15;65

STOP

COLUMN 15

COLUMN 65

ROW 60

ROW 60.5

horz.ex

NOTE: If the SCALE;DOT command is used to specify the dot resolution,

then the line thickness will be specified in that scale.

4–68

Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Lines, Vertical

Purpose

Mode

Defines vertical lines.

CREATE

Format

VERT

LT; C; SR; ER

STOP

VERT

The Vertical Line command; enter VERT.

Defines the line thickness, measured in 1/60” dots.

Enter a value of 1 or greater. Vertical line thickness

expands to the right from the starting column.

Defines the column where the vertical line begins.

Enter a value ranging from column 1 through one less

than the width of the form. Character column or dot

column is specified based on the Scale command (page

4–88), or use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).

Defines the starting row of the vertical line. Enter a

value ranging from row 1 through one less than the

length of the form. Character row or dot row is

specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or

use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).

Defines the ending row of the vertical line. Enter a

value ranging from row 2 through the last column of

the form. The ending row must be greater than the

starting row. Character row or dot row is specified

based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or use the

CP.DP format (page 4–7).

STOP

Stop indicates the end of the VERT command; enter

STOP. If not entered, the IGP/PGL expects another set

of Vertical Line command parameters.

Commands

4–69

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

The following program specifies 4 vertical lines. To illustrate positioning,

the starting row and column are indicated on the example but do not

necessarily reflect actual location on the page.

VERT

2;36;53;61

2;50;53;61

2;60;53;61

2;70;53;61

STOP

COLUMN 36

COLUMN 50

ROW 53

ROW 61

vert.ex

NOTE: If the SCALE; DOT command is used to specify the dot resolution,

the line thickness will be specified in that scale.

4–70

Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Listen

Purpose

Disables the IGP/PGL from the “quiet” state and enables the IGP/PGL for

standard operation. (The Quiet command is explained on page 4–84.)

Mode

NORMAL

Format

(cc)LISTEN

(cc)

The Special Function Control Character.

LISTEN

The Listen command; enter LISTEN.

NOTE:

When the IGP/PGL is in the quiet state, the currently selected line printer

emulation commands are active. Refer to your printer Setup Guide for a

description of these commands.

Commands

4–71

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Logo Call

Purpose

Selects and positions previously defined logo(s). (The logo itself is actually

defined separately in the Create Logo mode.) The logo may be defined

using TIFF files, PCX raster data, or IGP/PGL dots.

Mode

CREATE

Format

LOGO

SR; SC; logoname

STOP

LOGO

The Logo Call command; enter LOGO.

Defines the starting row of the logo. The SR (and SC)

parameter specifies the location for the logo based on

the upper left corner of the grid in which the logo was

defined. Enter a value ranging from row 1 through one

less than the length of the form. Character row or dot

row is specified based on the Scale command (page

4–88), or use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).

Defines the starting column of the logo. The SC (and

SR) parameter specifies the location for the logo based

on the upper left corner of the grid in which the logo

was defined.

Enter a value ranging from column 1 through one less

than the width of the form. Character column or dot

column is specified based on the Scale command (page

4–88), or use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).

logoname

Identifies a previously defined logo by name for use on

the form. Enter the logo name exactly as used to define

and store the logo.

STOP

Stop indicates the end of the LOGO command; enter

STOP, and the IGP/PGL will wait for a new command.

If not entered, the IGP/PGL will expect another set of

Logo Call command parameters.

4–72

Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

The following sample program specifies three logo calls placing the same

logo at three different locations. (The logo was previously defined and

stored.) The starting row and column specify the upper left corner of the

grid in which the logo was defined. To illustrate positioning, the starting

row and column are indicated on the example but do not necessarily reflect

actual location on the page.

LOGO

56;35;HAND

56;50;HAND

56;65;HAND

STOP

SR 56

SC 35

SC 50

SC 65

logocall.ex

When the logo to be executed is not found in memory, the default external

memory module is automatically searched. If the logo is found, it is loaded

into memory and execution resumes; otherwise, the “LOGO NOT FOUND”

error is printed.

NOTE: If an older application uses the disk parameter for the execute

command, it is ignored and the above steps are taken.

Commands

4–73

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Logo Mode, Create

Purpose

Places the IGP/PGL in the Create Logo mode, where logos can be defined

using the appropriate dot placements. (See TIFF Logo, page 4–92, and

PCX Logo, page 4–81, commands to define logos using TIFF or PCX

data.)

Mode

NORMAL

Format

(cc)LOGO; logoname; VL; HL [;DISK]

row#; dot; dot1–dot2; dot

END

(cc)

The Special Function Control Character.

LOGO

logoname

The Logo command; enter LOGO.

Enter a maximum of 12 alphanumeric characters for

the name of the logo. (Refer to page 4–5 for a list of

allowable Logo Name characters.) All future

references to this logo (Delete Logo or Logo Call

commands) must use this name. If a logo is defined

with the same name as a logo already existing in

memory, the newly defined logo will replace the

existing logo.

Defines the vertical length of the logo grid in dot rows;

enter a value sufficient for the vertical size of the logo,

not exceeding 252. The dot rows are vertically spaced

1/72–inch apart.

Defines the horizontal length of the logo grid in dot

columns; enter a value sufficient for the horizontal size

of the logo, not exceeding 240. On each row, the dots

are horizontally spaced 1/60–inch apart.

DISK

row#

Optional parameter to store the logo in the IGP/PGL

internal memory modules. Enter DISK.

Identifies the row number for each row of dots in the

logo. Enter each row number on a separate command

line. Rows are numbered sequentially from top to

bottom.

4–74

Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

dot

Identifies a single dot position in the row. Enter each

dot number used. Dots are numbered sequentially from

left to right.

dot1–dot2

Identifies a series of dot positions within the row,

including dot1 on the left end and dot2 on the right

end. Enter the series of dot rows. Series of dot rows

can be combined with single dot positions in the same

command line.

END

Terminates the Create Logo mode; enter END.

Comments The logo is defined by specifying the overall size and the rows of data

used. The actual number of logos you can create and store depends on the

memory required for each logo.

The maximum logo size allowed is 252 rows high (3.5 inches) and 240

columns wide (4 inches). Values exceeding either of these dimensions will

produce an error. To maximize memory space, do not define the vertical

and horizontal length of the logo grid larger than is required to capture the

design.

The printer produces a grid with 72 dots per inch vertically and 60 dots per

inch horizontally. Consequently, a logo must be designed using this scale.

The Logo Call command (page 4–72) in the Create Form mode brings the

predefined logo into a form. The starting row and column parameters refer

to the upper left corner of the logo grid. Once created, the logo is ready to

be used in any form and will print at the size shown.

Example

The following program shown on the next page produced the tape holder

logo.

Commands

4–75

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

~LOGO;TAPEHOLD;36;40

1;12–18

2;10–20

3;9–22

4;8–24

5;7–25

6;6–26

7;5–26

8;4–25

9;4–25

10;3–24

11;3–24

12;2–23

13;2–23

14;2–14;17–23

15;1–12;19–22;38–39

16;1–12;20–23;37–40

17;1–11;20–23;37–40

18;1–11;20–23;36–40

19;1–11;20–23;36–40

20;1–11;20–23;35–40

21;1–12;20–24;35–40

22;1–12;19–24;34–39

23;1–14;17–25;33–39

24;1–28;31–39

25;1–39

VL 36

26;2–38

27;2–38

TAPELOGO.EX

HL 40

28;2–37

29;3–37

30;3–36

31;3–36

32;4–35

33;5–34

34;6–33

35;7–32

36;9–30

END

4–76

Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Normal Mode

Purpose

Places the IGP/PGL in the Normal mode of operation, where the data

stream is not changed but monitored for a Special Function Control

Character followed by an IGP/PGL command.

Mode

NORMAL, EXECUTE

(cc)NORMAL

Format

(cc)

The Special Function Control Character.

NORMAL

The Normal mode command; enter NORMAL.

Comments Normal mode is entered automatically when the printer is powered on with

IGP/PGL. In Normal mode, the IGP/PGL uses the default font and line

spacing values.

A blank line or overlay data must always separate an EXECUTE command

from a NORMAL command, unless a form count is given for the

EXECUTE.

Commands

4–77

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Page Number

Purpose

Defines where a page number is placed on a form and automatically

increases the page number on each page.

Mode

CREATE

Format

PAGE; SR; SC

PAGE

The Page Number command; enter PAGE.

Defines the starting row of the page number. Enter a

value ranging from row 1 through one less than the

length of the form. Character row or dot row is

specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or

use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).

Defines the starting column of the page number. Enter

a value ranging from column 1 through one less than

the width of the form. Character column or dot column

is specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88),

or use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).

If the SR or SC extends beyond the page boundaries,

an Error 76 will occur in the Execute Form mode, and

default page number SR SC values are used.

Comments To begin automatically incrementing the page numbers, the starting page

number must be specified during the Execute command.

Example

The following command places the page numbers at row 60 column 70 on

the form.

PAGE;60;70

4–78

Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Paper

Purpose

Controls the printer cutter, print intensity, label sensor, page orientation

(portrait/landscape), and print speed.

Mode

NORMAL, EXECUTE

NOTE:

Format

More than one option may follow the paper command.

(cc)PAPER [;option[ #]]

NOTE:

Not all options may be available with your printer. Consult your printer’s

Setup Guide to determine which options are available. If an option is not

available, the emulation will ignore the corresponding command.

(cc)

The Special Function Control Character.

PAPER

The PAPER command; enter PAPER. Refer to

Table 4–3, on page 4–80.

CUT #

Sets the printer to cut a label after a specified number

of labels. Enter CUT, a space, and a number in the

range of 1 to 100 (1 implies no cutting).

EJECT

Prints all labels that are in the buffer. Enter EJECT.

INTENSITY #

Specifies the darkness of the dots. Enter INTENSITY,

a space, and a number in the range of –10 to +10.

LABELS #

Specifies the label sensor. Enter LABELS, then a

space, then a number: 0 = disable; 1 = Reflective

Sensor; 2 = Transmissive Sensor.

LANDSCAPE

PORTRAIT

Identifies the selected paper cassette in the landscape

orientation. Enter LANDSCAPE. See ROTATE.

Identifies the selected paper cassette in the portrait

(default) orientation. Enter PORTRAIT. See

ROTATE.

Commands

4–79

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ROTATE #

SPEED

Specifies the label rotation. Enter ROTATE, a space,

and either 0 (default) or 180, for portrait, or 90 or 270,

for landscape.

Specifies the print speed in lines per minute. Enter

SPEED, followed by a number in the range of 0 to

9999.

RIBSAVE #

TEAR #

Enables (or disables) the Ribbon Saver option. Replace

# with 1 to enable or with 0 to disable the option.

Sets the printer to present the label (so you can tear off

a label). Enter TEAR, a space, and 0 or 1 (0 = no

pause and 1 = tearoff).

Comments You can use any or all Paper parameters, listed in any order, in a single

Paper command. (Do not list any parameters on separate lines.) Parameters

not specified or specified incorrectly retain the previously selected value.

All Paper command parameters are reset to default values upon receiving a

RESET command. Multiple paper commands within a single form will

save the last paper command parameters specified.

Changing orientation between Portrait and Landscape may cause

previously defined forms to produce boundary error messages when the

form is executed because width and height values are switched.

Example

Based on power-up printer defaults, the following command selects the

landscape orientation.

~PAPER;LANDSCAPE

Table 4–3. Printer Speeds

Printer Model

Min. Speed (ips)

Max. Speed (ips)

Increments (ips)

T3204

T3304

T3306

T3308

0.5

4–80

Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PCX Logo

Purpose

Places the IGP/PGL in the Create Logo mode, where logos can be defined

using the PCX file format.

Mode

NORMAL

Format

(cc)(LOGO;logoname;PCX[;DISK](T)

<PCX raster data> (cc) RASTEREND [T]

END(T)

(cc)

The Special Function Control Character.

LOGO

logoname

The Logo command; enter LOGO.

Enter a maximum of 12 alphanumeric characters for

the name of the logo. (Refer to page 4–5 for a list of

allowable Logo Name characters.) All future

references to this logo (Delete Logo or Logo Call

commands) must use this name. If a logo is defined

with the same name as a logo already existing in

memory, the newly defined logo will replace the

existing logo.

PCX

The command denoting raster data in PCX format;

enter PCX.

DISK

Optional parameter to store the logo in the IGP/PGL

external memory modules. Enter DISK.

Line terminator.

PCX raster data

Scanned data in PCX format; data must be black and

white. Grey scales or color PCX files are currently not

supported. Both uncompressed and compressed

formats are supported.

(cc)

The Special Function Control Character.

RASTEREND

Denotes the end of the PCX raster data. Enter

RASTEREND.

END

Terminates the PCX logo; enter END.

Commands

4–81

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Comments The size and number of raster image logos are bounded by printer memory.

The logo call command in the Create Form mode brings the predefined

logo into a form. The starting row and column parameters refer to the upper

left corner of the logo grid. Once created, the logo is ready to be used in

any form and will print at the size shown.

Raster images may contain data that is interpreted by your host as control

codes. This may affect the way the host sends data to the printer. Consult

your host’s Setup Guide for sending binary data.

Be careful when editing PCX output files because most TEXT editors insert

carriage returns and line feeds. If a PCX file must be edited, use a binary or

hex editor.

4–82

Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Print File

Purpose

Prints files from the external memory module. Print File can be used to

show the SETUP functions that exist.

Mode

NORMAL

Format

(cc)PRINT; filename

(cc)

The Special Function Control Character.

The Print File command; enter PRINT.

The filename to be printed.

filename

Comments Do not use wildcard characters because the Print File command will

attempt to print any file in the external memory.

Forms and logos stored in the external memory module are stored in PGL

format, not in the format sent from the module; therefore, do not attempt to

print .frm or .lgo files.

Example

Examples of how to print setup.ptx:

~PRINT;SETUP.PTX

Commands

4–83

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Quiet

Purpose

Places the IGP/PGL in the Quiet mode, where all data passed to the

LinePrinter+ Emulation is unaffected by IGP/PGL commands except for

the LISTEN, SFON/SFOFF, IGON/IGOFF, and PTX_SETUP commands.

Mode

NORMAL

(cc)QUIET

Format

(cc)

The Special Function Control Character.

QUIET

The Quiet command; enter QUIET. The IGP/PGL

remains in the quiet state until the Listen command is

received.

Comments In the Quiet mode IGP/PGL ignores all commands except LISTEN,

SFON/SFOFF, IGON/IGOFF, and PTX_SETUP. All commands for the

currently selected protocol in the LinePrinter+ will be interpreted. See the

LinePrinter+ User’s Manual for details.

The IGP/PGL remains quiet until the LISTEN command (page 4–71)

enables standard IGP/PGL operation. The Quiet command is ignored if the

IGP/PGL is in the Execute Form mode.

4–84

Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Reset

Purpose

Deletes all forms and logos from IGP/PGL memory. The Reset performs

the following tasks:

•

Prints any objects in the current page

Selects the portrait orientation

Deletes all forms and logos resident in memory

Sets the font to the default Gothic 12 point/10CPI

Releases all user–defined character mappings

Runs the SETUP file if present

Mode

NORMAL, CREATE, or EXECUTE

(cc)RESET

Format

(cc)

The Special Function Control Character.

RESET

The Reset command; enter RESET.

Comments This command deletes all forms and logos, including those input by other

operators on shared IGP/PGL systems. To prevent the loss of information

contained in the 2K–byte input buffer of the serial interface, the Reset

command sequence must be the last item sent to the printer.

IMPORTANT

Wait several seconds after issuing a RESET command before sending

another IGP/PGL command. The RESET process must be thoroughly

completed before new IGP/PGL data is sent, or new data may be lost or

damaged.

Commands

4–85

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Reverse Print

Purpose

Defines an area of the form where form elements are reverse printed (white

on black).

Mode

CREATE

Format

REVERSE

[DARK;] SR; SC; ER; EC

STOP

REVERSE

The Reverse Printing command; enter REVERSE.

DARK

Optional parameter to select a denser black

background. Enter DARK, or DA, to select the denser

background. More information about dark printing is

provided on page 4–10.

Defines the starting row of the reverse print field. Enter

a value ranging from row 1 through one less than the

length of the form. Character row or dot row is

specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or

use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).

Defines the starting column of the reverse print field.

Enter a value ranging from column 1 through one less

than the width of the form. Character column or dot

column is specified based on the Scale command (page

4–88), or use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).

Defines the ending row of the reverse print field. Enter

a value ranging from row 2 through the last row of the

form. The ending row must be greater than the starting

row. Character row or dot row is specified based on the

Scale command (page 4–88), or use the CP.DP format

(page 4–7).

4–86

Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Defines the ending column of the reverse print field.

Enter a value ranging from column 2 through the last

column of the form. The ending column must be

greater than the starting column. Character column or

dot column is specified based on the Scale command

(page 4–88), or use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).

STOP

Stop indicates the end of the REVERSE command;

enter STOP, and the IGP/PGL will wait for a new

command. If not entered, the IGP/PGL will expect

another set of Reverse Print command parameters.

Comments You can use reverse print with all form elements (alpha, lines, boxes, etc.).

The IGP/PGL can also reverse print bar codes, but reverse printed bar

codes are unreadable by bar code scanning devices.

Commands

4–87

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scale

Purpose

Defines the vertical line spacing and the horizontal pitch of the form for

data positioning specified by character row and column or dot row and

column.

Mode

CREATE

Format

SCALE; DOT [;horz;vert] or SCALE; CHAR [;lpi] [;cpi]

SCALE

DOT

The Scale command; enter SCALE.

Specifies the dot scale. Enter DOT.

Specifies the character scale. Enter CHAR.

CHAR

lpi

The optional vertical line spacing parameter (in lines

per inch) for character scaling. Enter: any integer

value from 1 to the target DPI. The default is 6 lpi.

cpi

The optional horizontal pitch parameter (in characters

per inch) for character scaling. Enter 10, 12, 13, 15, 17,

or 20. The default is 10 cpi.

horz/vert

Gives resolution for the dot parameter. Default is 60

dpi (horizontal) by 72 dpi (vertical).

Comments If the character scale is selected, starting row/column or ending

row/column parameters are specified by character row and column. The

lines per inch (lpi) value for a character scale form can be set to any integer

value from 1 to the target DPI. Characters per inch (cpi) horizontally can be

either 10, 12, 13, 15, 17, or 20. For example, on a printer with a maximum

print width of 80 columns, an 8–1/2 x 11–inch form at the 6 lpi 10 cpi

default has 66 rows and 80 columns in the character scale. (Refer to your

printer Setup Guide to determine your maximum print boundaries.)

If the dot scale is selected, the parameters are specified in dot row and

column. For example, based on a 60 dpi horizontal and 72 dpi vertical dot

scale, a form of 8–1/2 x 11 inches has 792 rows (72 dpi x 11 inches) and

510 columns (60 dpi x 8–1/2 inches), and a form of 8 x 11 inches has 792

rows and 480 columns. Refer to Appendix C for more information about

maximum values with other paper sizes.

4–88

Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The default scale factor uses character row and column (6 lpi and 10 cpi).

Anytime CP.DP format (page 4–7) is used, the scale assumes 6 lpi and 10

cpi and a 60 x 72 dpi format.

You can change the Scale at any time during forms creation by using either

of the Scale commands. Elements designed before the scale change will

print at the former scale, while those elements following the scale change

will print at the current scale.

NOTE:

Scale affects data position, not the printed data itself. For example,

alphanumeric data printed at 10 cpi will still print at 10 cpi after a Scale

change; however, where the data is placed on the page is affected.

Also, Scale affects line thickness if dot scale and horizontal/vertical scaling

are given.

Commands

4–89

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Select Format

Purpose

Enables the IGP/PGL to ignore all host–generated paper movement

commands (00–0F hex).

Mode

NORMAL, CREATE or EXECUTE

(cc)SFON or (cc)SFOFF

Format

NOTE:

A line terminator is not required in the Select Format Sequence.

(cc)

The Special Function Control Character.

The Select Format On command. Enter SFON.

Exits Select Format. Enter SFOFF.

SFON

SFOFF

Comments During Select Format, you may enter the following IGP/PGL paper

movement commands. All the commands must be entered in UPPERCASE.

These commands can only be used with the Select Format command. If

used at any other time, an error condition may result.

Command

(cc)CR

Paper Movement Function

Sends a carriage return (hex 0D)

Sends a line feed (hex 0A)

Sends a form feed (hex 0C)

(cc)LF

(cc)FF

Although the Select Format command enables the IGP/PGL to ignore all

host–generated paper movement commands, you can input IGP/PGL paper

movement commands with Select Format on.

SFON/SFOFF cannot be used during Ignore Sequence (page 4–65).

Also, during the downloading of TIFF and PCX logos, the SFON/SFOFF

commands are ignored, and, instead, the printer receives the raw data.

4–90

Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Purpose

Automatically executes and loads IGP/PGL commands such as forms,

logos, customized print environments, etc., from external memory to the

printer whenever printer power is applied or when the RESET command

(page 4–85) is sent.

Mode

NORMAL

Format

(cc)SETUP

HOST DATA

(cc)SETUPEND

(cc)

The Special Function Control Character.

SETUP

HOST DATA

The Setup command; enter SETUP.

Any IGP/PGL commands, form definitions, text, etc.

to be stored and executed at power–up.

SETUPEND

Finishes storing host data and returns the printer to the

NORMAL mode. Enter SETUPEND.

Comments Because the RESET command causes the setup routine to be executed, the

RESET command can not be in the SETUP information or else an infinite

loop will occur.

If IGP/PGL commands have not been added between the SETUP and

SETUPEND commands, the SETUP.PTX file in the IGP/PGL external

memory module is automatically deleted, and no IGP/PGL SETUP

commands are executed upon printer power–up.

NOTE: The SETUP.PTX is automatically created by the IGP/PGL when the

~SETUPEND command is received. When the SETUP.PTX file is

not in external memory, no extra IGP/PGL commands are

performed on power up.

Commands

4–91

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TIFF Logo

Purpose

Places the IGP/PGL in the Create Logo mode, where logos can be defined

using a Tagged Image File Format (TIFF).

Mode

NORMAL

Format

(cc)(LOGO;logoname;TIFF[;DISK](T)

<TIFF raster data> (cc) RASTEREND [T]

END(T)

(cc)

The Special Function Control Character.

LOGO

logoname

The Logo command; enter LOGO.

Enter a maximum of 12 alphanumeric characters for

the name of the logo. (Refer to page 4–5 for a list of

allowable Logo Name characters.) All future

references to this logo (Delete Logo or Logo Call

commands) must use this name. If a logo is defined

with the same name as a logo already existing in

memory, the newly defined logo will replace the

existing logo.

TIFF

DISK

The command denoting raster data in TIFF format;

enter TIFF.

Optional parameter to store the logo in the IGP/PGL

external memory module. Enter DISK.

Line terminator.

TIFF raster data Scanned data in TIFF format; data must be black and

white. Grey scales or color TIFF files are currently not

supported. Both uncompressed and packed–bits

compression formats are supported.

(cc)

The Special Function Control Character.

RASTEREND

Denotes the end of the TIFF raster data. Enter

RASTEREND.

END

Terminates the TIFF logo; enter END.

4–92

Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Comments The size and number of raster image logos are bounded by printer memory.

The logo call command in the Create Form mode brings the predefined

logo into a form. The starting row and column parameters refer to the upper

left corner of the logo grid. Once created, the logo is ready to be used in

any form and will print at the size shown.

Raster images may contain data that is interpreted by your host as control

codes. This may affect the way the host sends data to the printer. Consult

your host’s Setup Guide for sending binary data.

Be careful when editing TIFF output files because most TEXT editors

insert carriage returns and line feeds. If a TIFF file must be edited, use a

binary or hex editor.

NOTE: Be careful sending TIFF data. The LOGO line must be terminated

and then the TIFF data must follow immediately (with no extra

CR/LF’s). Otherwise, improper operation will result.

Commands

4–93

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4–94

Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Bar Codes

Chapter Contents

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2

User–Defined Variable Bar Code Ratios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4

PDF Character Sizes [PDF [;LOC] [;FONT] (T)] . . . . . . . . 5–20

Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–21

Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–28

Codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–35

Code 128B and Code 128C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–42

Code UCC–128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–51

EAN 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–57

EAN 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–64

FIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–71

Interleaved 2/5 (I–2/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–78

MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–85

PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–92

POSTNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–98

UPC–A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–104

UPC–E and UPC–E0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–111

Incremental Bar Code Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–120

Incrementing Bar Code Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–121

Incremental Bar Code Fixed Data Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–124

Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–127

Duplicating Incremental Bar Code Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–128

Bar Codes

5–1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Overview

A bar code is a graphic representation of alphanumeric characters. Bar codes

are produced by entering bar code commands in the Create Form Mode. The

IGP/PGL bar codes are listed below, in Table 5–1, with detailed bar code

information provided on the referenced pages.

All parameters must be separated by a semicolon (;) unless noted otherwise.

Throughout this chapter, actual commands required for input are shown

exactly as they must be entered, while all parameters associated with that

command are shown in italics. Optional parameters are enclosed in brackets.

Spaces are used only to visually separate the command parameters, but do

not enter these spaces in your command.

Table 5–1. Available Bar Codes

SYMBOL

BAR CODE

Code 39

MNEMONIC

LENGTH

Variable

CODE SET

PAGE NO.

(Page 5–21)

(Page 5–28)

(Page 5–35)

C39

Alphanumeric

Code 93

CODE 93

C128B

Code 128 –

Subset B

PDF417

C128C

Variable

Alphanumeric

Numeric

(Page 5–35)

Code 128 –

Subset C

Codabar

CODABAR

UCC–128

Variable

Alphanumeric

Numeric

(Page 5–35)

(Page 5–51)

Code UCC– 128

19 or 20

digits

EAN 8

EAN13

EAN8

7 digits

Numeric

(Page 5–57)

(Page 5–64)

EAN13

12 digits

FIM

I–2/5

MSI

N/A

A, B, C, or D

Numeric

(Page 5–71)

(Page 5–78)

Interleaved 2/5

MSI

Variable

13 or 14

digits

Variable

(Page 5–85)

5–2

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 5–1. Available Bar Codes (Continued)

SYMBOL

BAR CODE

Postnet

MNEMONIC

LENGTH

CODE SET

PAGE NO.

POSTNET

5, 9 or 11

digits

Numeric

(Page 5–98)

UPC–A

Numeric

11 or 6

Numeric

(Page 5–104)

(Page 5–111)

UPC–E and

UPC–E0

UPC–E

UPC–E0

Bar Codes

5–3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User–Defined Variable Bar Code Ratios [R[D]ratio]

The user–defined variable ratio for bar codes is an optional parameter. The

default ratios shown in Table 5–2 through Table 5–9 are overridden by the

variable ratio feature. Four- and eight-digit ratios can be used, depending

upon the bar code selected. Ratio data must be decimal values greater than 0.

Enter R, followed by the actual bar code ratio. A colon must separate each

element of the ratio.

Like standard bar code ratios, user–defined ratios are also interpreted from

left to right, measuring the size of each bar or space, in dot width, in the

following pattern: narrow bar : narrow space : wide bar : wide space. Either

enter four or eight values depending upon the bar code type.

If the ‘D’ parameter is specified, the ratios are represented in printer dots

instead of IGP PGL dots (60 x 72 dpi).

NOTE: The IGP/PGL does not verify that ratio data creates acceptable

wide/narrow element relationships for bar code readability. When

designing unique ratio data, carefully plot wide and narrow ratios to

conform to readable bar codes.

Table 5–2. T3306 & T3308 Binary Bar Code Sizes (Normal & Inverted Drawing)

5–4

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Format

Size

Avg. X Dim.

16.7 mil

13.3 mil

10 mil

Ratio

2.8:1

2.2:1

2.5:1

2.75:1

2.25:1

2.67:1

2.33:1

2.5:1

2.8:1

C 3/9,

Codabar

(Portrait Page)

X1A

X1B

X1C

X1D

X1E

X1F

X1G

10 mil

6.7 mil

33.3 mil

50 mil

66.7 mil

Bar Codes

5–5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 5–2. T3306 & T3308 Binary Bar Code Sizes (Continued)

Format

Size

Avg. X Dim.

16.7 mil

13.3 mil

10 mil

Ratio

3:1

C 3/9

Codabar

(Landscape Page)

X1A

X1B

X1C

X1D

X1E

X1F

X1G

2.1:1

2.56:1

2.71:1

2.14:1

2.71:1

2.14:1

2.6:1

10 mil

8.3 mil

35 mil

2.8:1

50 mil

2.8:1

66.7 mil

16.7 mil

20 mil

2.8:1

I 2/5

(Portrait Page)

2.8:1

X1A

X1B

X1C

X1D

X1E

X1F

X1G

2.67:1

2.2:1

16.7 mil

13.3 mil

10 mil

2.5:1

2.75:1

2.67:1

2.33:1

2.5:1

10 mil

6.7 mil

36.7 mil

30 mil

2.27:1

2.33:1

2.5:1

X2A

53.3 mil

70 mil

2.43:1

5–6

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I 25

X1A

X1B

X1C

X1D

X1E

X1F

X1G

16.7 mil

20 mil

2.8:1

2.67:1

2.2:1

(Landscape Page)

16.7 mil

13.3 mil

10 mil

2.5:1

2.75:1

2.67:1

2.33:1

2.6:1

10 mil

6.7 mil

36.7 mil

30 mil

2.27:1

2.33:1

2.5:1

X2A

53.3 mil

70 mil

2.43:1

Bar Codes

5–7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 5–2. T3306 & T3308 Binary Bar Code Sizes (Continued)

Format

Size

Avg. X Dim.

16.7 mil

23.3 mil

33.3 mil

40 mil

Ratio

2.8:1

MSI

(Portrait Page)

2.57:1

2.3:1

2.33:1

2.8:1

MSI

16.7 mil

23.3 mil

33.3 mil

40 mil

(Landscape Page)

2.57:1

2.3:1

2.33:1

Table 5–3. T3306 & T3308 Binary Bar Code Sizes (CW & CCW Drawing)

Format

Size

Avg. X Dim.

20 mil

Ratio

2.5:1

C 3/9

Codabar

(Portrait Page)

X1A

X1B

X1C

X1D

X1E

X1F

X1G

13.3 mil

20 mil

2.75:1

2.83:1

2.71:1

2.14:1

2.71:1

2.14:1

2.6:1

13.3 mil

10 mil

8.3 mil

26.7 mil

40 mil

2.88:1

2.92:1

2.94:1

53.3 mil

5–8

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C 3/9

Codabar

(Landscape Page)

X1A

X1B

X1C

X1D

X1E

X1F

X1G

20 mil

13.3 mil

20 mil

2.5:1

2.75:1

2.83:1

2.75:1

2.25:1

2.67:1

2.33:1

2.5:1

13.3 mil

10 mil

6.7 mil

26.7 mil

40 mil

2.88:1

2.92:1

2.94:1

53.3 mil

Table 5–3. T3306 & T3308 Binary Bar Code Sizes (Continued)

Format

Size

Avg. X Dim.

20 mil

Ratio

2.5:1

I 2/5

(Portrait Page)

X1A

X1B

X1C

X1D

X1E

X1F

X1G

13.3 mil

20 mil

2.75:1

2.83:1

2.71:1

2.14:1

2.71:1

2.14:1

2.6:1

13.3 mil

10 mil

8.3 mil

26.7 mil

40 mil

2.88:1

2.13:1

2.92:1

2.94:1

X2A

53.3 mil

Bar Codes

5–9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I 25

X1A

X1B

X1C

X1D

X1E

X1F

X1G

20 mil

13.3 mil

20 mil

2.5:1

2.75:1

2.83:1

2.75:1

2.25:1

2.67:1

2.33:1

2.5:1

(Landscape Page)

13.3 mil

10 mil

6.7 mil

26.7 mil

40 mil

2.88:1

2.13:1

2.92:1

2.94:1

2.8:1

X2A

53.3 mil

16.7 mil

23.3 mil

33.3 mil

40 mil

MSI

(Portrait Page)

2.57:1

2.3:1

2.33:1

2.8:1

MSI

16.7 mil

23.3 mil

33.3 mil

40 mil

(Landscape Page)

2.57:1

2.3:1

2.33:1

5–10

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 5–4. T3306 & T3308 4-Element Bar Code Sizes (Normal & Inverted Drawing)

Format

Size

Avg. X Dim.

Ratio

UPC

EAN

13.3 mil

(Mag: 1.03)

4:3:2:1

(Portrait Page)

X1.5

X0.5

16.7 mil

(Mag: 1.28)

4:3:2:1

11.7 mil

(Mag: 0.90)

UPC

EAN

(Landscape Page)

13.3 mil

(Mag: 1.03)

X1.5

X0.5

16.7 mil

(Mag: 1.28)

11.7 mil

(Mag: 0.90)

C128

C93

(Portrait Page)

X1.5

X1A

16.7

23.3

13.3

33.3

4:3:2:1

66.7

83.3

16.7

23.3

13.3

33.3

C128

C93

(Landscape Page)

X1.5

X1A

66.7

83.3

Table 5–5. T3306 & T3308 4-Element Bar Code Sizes (CW & CCW Drawing)

Format

Size

Avg. X Dim.

Ratio

UPC

EAN

13.3 mil

(Mag: 1.03)

4:3:2:1

(Portrait Page)

X1.5

X0.5

16.7 mil

(Mag: 1.28)

4:3:2:1

11.7 mil

(Mag: 0.90)

Bar Codes

5–11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 5–5. T3306 & T3308 4-Element Bar Code Sizes (Continued)

Format

Size

Avg. X Dim.

Ratio

UPC

EAN

13.3 mil

(Mag: 1.03)

4:3:2:1

(Landscape Page)

X1.5

X0.5

16.7 mil

(Mag: 1.28)

4:3:2:1

11.7 mil

(Mag: 0.90)

C128

C93

(Portrait Page)

X1.5

X1A

13.3 mil

20 mil

4:3:2:1

10 mil

26.7 mil

40 mil

53.3 mil

80 mil

C128

C93

(Landscape Page)

13.3 mil

20 mil

X1.5

X1A

10 mil

26.7 mil

40 mil

53.3 mil

80 mil

Table 5–6. T3204 & T3304 Binary Bar Code Sizes (Normal & Inverted Drawing)

5–12

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Format

Size

Avg. X Dim.

16.7 mil

13.3 mil

10 mil

Ratio

2.67:1

2.33:1

2.6:1

2.5:1

2:1

C 3/9,

Codabar

(Portrait Page)

X1A

X1B

X1C

X1D

X1E

X1F

X1G

2.5:1

3:1

10 mil

6.7 mil

33.3 mil

50 mil

2.7:1

2.8:1

66.7 mil

Table 5–6. T3204 & T3304 Binary Bar Code Sizes (Continued)

Format

Size

Avg. X Dim.

16.7 mil

13.3 mil

10 mil

Ratio

2.67:1

2.33:1

2.6:1

2.5:1

2:1

C 3/9,

Codabar

(Landscape Page)

X1A

X1B

X1C

X1D

X1E

X1F

X1G

2.5:1

2:1

10 mil

8.3 mil

35 mil

2.7:1

2.8:1

50 mil

66.7 mil

Bar Codes

5–13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I 2/5

(Portrait Page)

X1A

X1B

X1C

X1D

X1E

X1F

X1G

16.7 mil

20 mil

2.67:1

2.75:1

2.33:1

2.5:1

2:1

16.7 mil

13.3 mil

10 mil

2.5:1

3:1

10 mil

6.7 mil

36.7 mil

30 mil

2.2:1

2.67:1

2.43:1

2.36:1

2.67:1

2.75:1

2.33:1

2.5:1

2:1

X2A

53.3 mil

70 mil

I 2/5

(Landscape Page)

16.7 mil

20 mil

X1A

X1B

X1C

X1D

X1E

X1F

X1G

16.7 mil

13.3 mil

10 mil

2.5:1

2:1

10 mil

6.7 mil

36.7 mil

30 mil

2.2:1

2.67:1

2.43:1

2.36:1

X2A

53.3 mil

70 mil

Table 5–6. T3204 & T3304 Binary Bar Code Sizes (Continued)

Format

Size

Avg. X Dim.

16.7 mil

23.3 mil

33.3 mil

40 mil

Ratio

2.67:1

2.56:1

2.23:1

2.25:1

MSI

(Portrait Page)

5–14

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MSI

16.7 mil

23.3 mil

33.3 mil

40 mil

2.67:1

2.56:1

2.23:1

2.25:1

(Landscape Page)

Table 5–7. T3204 & T3304 Binary Bar Code Sizes (CW & CCW Drawing)

Format

Size

Avg. X Dim.

20 mil

Ratio

2.5:1

2.75:1

2.5:1

2:1

C 3/9,

Codabar

(Portrait Page)

X1A

X1B

X1C

X1D

X1E

X1F

X1G

13.3 mil

20 mil

13.3 mil

10 mil

2.5:1

2:1

10 mil

8.3 mil

26.7 mil

40 mil

2.33:1

2.8:1

2.88:1

2.9:1

2.5:1

2.75:1

2.5:1

2:1

53.3 mil

20 mil

C 3/9,

Codabar

(Landscape Page)

X1A

X1B

X1C

X1D

X1E

X1F

X1G

13.3 mil

20 mil

13.3 mil

10 mil

2.5:1

2:1

10 mil

6.7 mil

26.7 mil

40 mil

2:1

2.8:1

2.88:1

2.9:1

53.3 mil

Table 5–7. T3204 & T3304 Binary Bar Code Sizes (Continued)

Bar Codes

5–15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Format

Size

Avg. X Dim.

20 mil

Ratio

2.5:1

2.75:1

2.5:1

2:1

I 2/5

(Portrait Page)

X1A

X1B

X1C

X1D

X1E

X1F

X1G

13.3 mil

20 mil

13.3 mil

10 mil

2.5:1

2:1

10 mil

8.3 mil

26.7 mil

40 mil

2.33:1

2.8:1

2:1

X2A

2.88:1

2.9:1

2.5:1

2.75:1

2.5:1

2:1

53.3 mil

20 mil

I 2/5

(Landscape Page)

X1A

X1B

X1C

X1D

X1E

X1F

X1G

13.3 mil

20 mil

13.3 mil

10 mil

2.5:1

2:1

10 mil

6.7 mil

26.7 mil

40 mil

2:1

2.8:1

2:1

X2A

2.88:1

2.9:1

2.66:1

2.56:1

2.23:1

2.25:1

2.66:1

2.56:1

2.23:1

2.25:1

53.3 mil

16.7 mil

23.3 mil

33.3 mil

40 mil

MSI

(Portrait Page)

MSI

16.7 mil

23.3 mil

33.3 mil

40 mil

(Landscape Page)

5–16

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 5–8. T3204 & T3304 4-Element Bar Code Sizes (Normal & Inverted Drawing)

Format

Size

Avg. X Dim.

Ratio

UPC

EAN

13.3 mil

(Mag: 1.03)

4:3:2:1

(Portrait Page)

X1.5

X0.5

16.7 mil

(Mag: 1.28)

4:3:2:1

11.7 mil

(Mag: 0.90)

UPC

EAN

(Landscape Page)

13.3 mil

(Mag: 1.03)

X1.5

X0.5

16.7 mil

(Mag: 1.28)

11.7 mil

(Mag: 0.90)

C128

C93

(Portrait Page)

X1.5

X1A

16.7

23.3

13.3

33.3

4:3:2:1

66.7

83.3

16.7

23.3

13.3

33.3

C128

C93

(Landscape Page)

X1.5

X1A

66.7

83.3

Table 5–9. T3204 & T3304 4-Element Bar Code Sizes (CW & CCW Drawing)

Format

Size

Avg. X Dim.

Ratio

UPC

EAN

13.3 mil

(Mag: 1.03)

4:3:2:1

(Portrait Page)

X1.5

X0.5

16.7 mil

(Mag: 1.28)

4:3:2:1

11.7 mil

(Mag: 0.90)

Bar Codes

5–17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 5–9. T3204 & T3304 4-Element Bar Code Sizes (Continued)

Format

Size

Avg. X Dim.

Ratio

UPC

EAN

13.3 mil

(Mag: 1.03)

4:3:2:1

(Landscape Page)

X1.5

X0.5

16.7 mil

(Mag: 1.28)

4:3:2:1

11.7 mil

(Mag: 0.90)

C128

C93

(Portrait Page)

X1.5

X1A

13.3 mil

20 mil

4:3:2:1

10 mil

26.7 mil

40 mil

53.3 mil

80 mil

C128

C93

(Landscape Page)

13.3 mil

20 mil

X1.5

X1A

10 mil

26.7 mil

40 mil

53.3 mil

80 mil

5–18

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Variable Ratio Sample

~CREATE;TEST

(Enters Create Form mode)

(Alpha command)

SCALE;CHAR

ALPHA

2;5;1;1;1;*Std. Ratio*

STOP

(Ends Alpha command)

(Bar code command)

BARCODE

C3/9;X1;H7;3;5

“CODE39”

PDF;B;N

(Printable data field)

STOP

(Ends bar code command)

ALPHA

(Alpha command)

2;30;1;1;*Var. Ratio*

STOP

(Ends bar code command)

(Bar code command)

BARCODE

C3/9;XRD2:2:5:5;H7;3;30

“CODE39”

PDF;B;N

(Printable data field)

STOP

(Ends bar code command)

(Terminates Create Form mode)

(Prints the form)

END

~EXECUTE;TEST;1

Bar Codes

5–19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PDF Character Sizes [PDF [;LOC] [;FONT] (T)]

UPC and EAN

For UPC and EAN bar codes, a smaller Letter Gothic font will be substituted

for OCR–A or OCR–B when the bar code symbol is not large enough to

accommodate a 10 CPI font.

Other Bar Codes

For all other bar codes, OCR–A and OCR–B will print at 10 CPI. However,

when using the Normal font, the PDF will be automatically sized to fit the

length of the bar code symbol, if necessary.

NOTE: The DARK parameter is ignored for all bar codes.

5–20

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code 39

The Code 39 structure is shown in Figure 5–1 and described on the following

pages.

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

SR, SC

POSITION

SR, SC

POSITION

STOP

CODE

STOP

CODE

OPTIONAL

CHECK

DIGIT

OPTIONAL

CHECK

DIGIT

DATA

FIELD

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

START

CODE

START

CODE

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

HEIGHT

OPTIONAL

CHECK DIGIT

SR, SC

POSITION

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

UPPER GUARD BAND

HEIGHT

QUIET START

STOP QUIET

CODE ZONE

DATA FIELD

ZONE

CODE

LOWER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL

CHECK DIGIT

SR, SC

POSITION

UPPER GUARD BAND

DATA FIELD

QUIET START

STOP QUIET

CODE ZONE

HEIGHT

ZONE

CODE

LOWER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

Figure 5–1. Code 39 Structure

Bar Codes

5–21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Quiet Zone

Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet

zones must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure

accurate reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes

from overlapping. Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the

quiet zones.

Start/Stop Codes

The start/stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing

end of the bar code. The start/stop code is automatically produced with

each bar code. The start/stop code structure permits bidirectional bar code

scanning.

Data Field

The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to

represent standard alphanumeric characters. Each wide or narrow bar or

space is one element; each character in the data field has nine elements.

The structure is three wide elements (bars or spaces) out of the nine total

elements which compose one character.

Readable Data

The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the

bar code data. It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol.

Check Digit

The optional modulo–43 check digit can be inserted into the bar code to

verify accurate scanning.

5–22

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code 39 Command Format

NOTE: Although commonly referred to as Code “39,” you must enter the

command as “C3/9” (including the slash) during IGP/PGL input.

BARCODE

C3/9 [CD]; [VSCAN;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;L;] [DARK;] SR; SC

[(D)data field(D)]

[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]

STOP

BARCODE

C3/9 CD

The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.

Designates bar code type C39; enter C3/9. To calculate

and plot the optional modulo–43 check digit with the

bar code symbol automatically, enter CD.

VSCAN

Optional parameter to orient the bar code structure

vertically. To select a vertical bar code, enter VSCAN.

If VSCAN is not entered, the bar code is oriented

horizontally.

MAG

Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally expand)

the bar code symbol. The magnification default value

is X1. As required for scanning, enter a magnification

value to increase the magnification. Increasing the

magnification adjusts printed character density.

You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 5–4.

Hn[.m]

Optional parameter to adjust the overall height

(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol (including

the upper and lower 0.1– inch guard bands and any

human readable data). Height adjustments are made in

0.1–inch increments plus dots; enter H and a value

from 4 to 99 to select height adjustments from 0.4 to

9.9 inches. The default value is 0.9 inch.

.m is an additional number of dots for the bar code

height. (Dots are in the current dot scale.)

Bar Codes

5–23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BFn;L

Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code

data field location on a form and for designating the

length of the data field. With these parameters, the

actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically

provided during the Execute Form Mode; the data is

not specified during the Create Form Mode. To use this

field, perform the following steps:

a. Enter BF.

b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 255

to identify the bar code field. The SR and SC

parameters specify the exact location of the bar

code field identified by n.

c. Replace L with a number equaling the total

number of characters in the field. (The actual

data provided dynamically during the Execute

Form Mode can be less than L.)

d. The information for the data field is entered

dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.

(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code

Data” on page 4–55 in the “Commands”

chapter.) Do not use the data field parameter to

enter data when the BFn;L parameters are used.

However, refer to the data field description for

available characters.

DARK

Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar

codes. Enter DARK. Refer to Dark Printing on page

4–10 for more information.

Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a value

ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the

form. Character row or dot row is specified based on

the Scale command (page 4–88), or use the CP.DP

format (page 4–7).

5–24

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width

of the form. Character column or dot column is

specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or

use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).

The printable character (delimiter) identifying the start

and finish of the data field. Enter any printable

character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a

character used within the data. The same character

must be used at both ends of the data field, but it is not

printed with the data.

data field

Contains the bar code characters. A null data field (no

characters) is permitted. The length of the data field is

variable; however, the maximum length is usually

limited to 32 characters to minimize potential reading

errors.

PDF

Optional parameter to enable printing of the human

readable data field. Enter PDF to print the data field. If

the parameter is not used, the human readable data will

not print. This parameter is not allowed if a null data

field is specified.

LOC

Optional parameter to identify the location of the

printable data field. The default value is B, locating the

human readable data below the bar code. A locates the

printable data field above bar code. To compensate for

printing the 0.1–inch high data, the height of the bar

code body is reduced 0.1 inch.

FONT

Optional parameter to select the font for the human

readable data field. The default value is N, selecting

the normal ASCII 10 cpi font. Enter O to select the

OCR–A 10 cpi font; enter X to select the OCR–B 10

cpi type font.

STOP

Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP/PGL

continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If

STOP is not entered, an error message results.

Bar Codes

5–25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 5–10. Code 39 Character Set

C= Character

H = Hex

–

Space

Code 39 Example

Figure 5–2 illustrates a horizontal and vertical Code 39 bar code generated

by the following program:

~CREATE;C39

BARCODE

C3/9;DARK;40;15

*SAMPLE C3/9*

PDF

(Enter Create Form Mode)

(Bar Code Command)

(Dark Code 39 at SR 40, SC 15)

(Data Field)

(Printable Data Field)

STOP

(Ends Bar Code Command)

(New Bar Code Command)

BARCODE

C3/9;VSCAN;H14;DARK;27;58

(Vert Dark Code 39, H 1.4, at SR 27, SC 58)

*SAMPLE C3/9*

PDF

(Data Field)

(Printable Data Field)

STOP

(Ends Bar Code Command)

(Terminates Create Form Mode)

(Execute the form, form count of 1)

END

~EXECUTE;C39;1

5–26

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SC 58

SR 27

SC 15

SR 40

CODE3–9.EX

Figure 5–2. Sample Code 39 Bar Codes

Bar Codes

5–27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code 93

The Code 93 structure is shown in Figure 5–3 and described on the following

pages.

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

SR, SC

POSITION

SR, SC

POSITION

STOP

CODE

STOP

CODE

CHECK

DIGIT

FIELD

CHECK

DIGIT

FIELD

DATA

FIELD

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

START

CODE

START

CODE

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

HEIGHT

CHECK DIGIT

FIELD

SR, SC

POSITION

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

UPPER GUARD BAND

HEIGHT

QUIET START

STOP QUIET

CODE ZONE

DATA FIELD

ZONE

CODE

LOWER GUARD BAND

CHECK DIGIT

FIELD

SR, SC

POSITION

UPPER GUARD BAND

DATA FIELD

QUIET START

STOP QUIET

CODE ZONE

HEIGHT

ZONE

CODE

LOWER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

Figure 5–3. Code 93 Structure

5–28

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Quiet Zone

Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet

zones must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure

accurate reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes

from overlapping. Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the

quiet zones.

Start/Stop Codes

The start/stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the bar code.

Code 93 Data Field

The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to

represent an extensive character set. The bars and spaces vary in width

from one to four modules. Each character consists of three bars and three

spaces that total 11 modules.

Readable Data

The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the

bar code data. It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol.

Check Digit

The modulo–103 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the

bar code symbol. The check digit verifies accurate scanning. The start code

is included in the check digit algorithm.

Bar Codes

5–29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code 93 Command Format

BARCODE

CODE93[;VSCAN][;MAG][Hn[.m]][;BFn;L][;DARK];SR;SC(T)

[(D)<data field>(D)(T)]

[PDF[;LOC][;FONT](T)]

STOP

BARCODE

CODE93

VSCAN

The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.

Designates bar code type Code 93; enter CODE93.

Optional parameter to orient the bar code structure

vertically. To select a vertical bar code, enter VSCAN.

If VSCAN is not entered, the bar code is oriented

horizontally.

MAG

Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally expand)

the bar code symbol. The magnification default value

is X1. Increasing the magnification adjusts printed

character density.

You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 5–4.

(You must specify 8 digits for MAG for variable ratio.)

Hn[.m]

Optional parameter to adjust the overall height

(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol (including

the upper and lower 0.1–inch guard bands and any

human readable data).

Height adjustments are made in 0.1–inch increments;

enter H and a value from 4 to 99 to select height

adjustments from 0.4 to 9.9 inches. The default value is

0.9 inch.

.m is an additional number of dots for the bar code

height. (Dots are in the current dot scale.)

BFn;L

Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code

data field location on a form and for designating the

length of the data field. With these parameters, the

actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically

provided during the Execute Form Mode; the data is

not specified during the Create Form Mode.

5–30

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To use this field, perform the following steps:

a. Enter BF.

b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 255

to identify the bar code field. The SR and SC

parameters specify the exact location of the bar

code field identified by n.

c. Replace L with a number equaling the total

number of characters in the field. (The actual

data provided dynamically during the Execute

Form Mode can be less than L.)

d. The information for the data field is entered

dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.

(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code

Data” on page 4–55 in the “Commands”

chapter.) Do not use the data field parameter to

enter data when the BFn;L parameters are used.

However, refer to the data field description for

available characters.

DARK

Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar

codes. Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on page

4–10 for more information.

Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a value

ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the

form. Character row or dot row is specified based on

the Scale command (page 4–88), or use the CP.DP

format (page 4–7).

Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width

of the form. Character column or dot column is

specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or

use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).

The printable character (delimiter) identifying the start

and finish of the data field. Enter any printable

character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a

character used within the data.

Bar Codes

5–31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The same character must be used at both ends of the

data field, but it will not print with the data.

data field

Enter the data for the bar code. A null data field (no

characters) is permitted. The length of the data field is

variable; however, the maximum length is usually

limited to 32 characters to minimize potential reading

errors.

PDF

Optional parameter to enable printing of the human

readable data field. Enter PDF to print the data field. If

the parameter is not used, the human readable data will

not print. This parameter is not allowed if a null data

field was specified.

LOC

Optional parameter to identify the location of the

printable data field. The default value is B, locating the

human readable data below the bar code. A locates the

printable data field above bar code. To compensate for

printing the 0.1–inch high data, the height of the bar

code body is reduced 0.1 inch.

FONT

Optional parameter to select the font for the human

readable data field. The default value, N, selects the

normal ASCII 10 cpi font. Enter O to select the

OCR–A 10 cpi font; enter X to select the OCR–B 10

cpi type font.

STOP

Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP/PGL

continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If

STOP is not entered, an error message results.

5–32

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 5–11. Code 93 Character Set

Character

Hex

Character

Hex

–

SPACE

N/A

Start

Stop

Bar Codes

5–33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code 93 Example

The illustration below shows a horizontal Code 93 bar code generated by the

following program:

~CREATE;TEST;288

SCALE;CHAR

BARCODE

(Enters Create Form mode)

(Bar code command)

CODE93;X1;H7;10;20

“ABCD5678”

PDF;B;N

(Printable data field)

STOP

END

~EXECUTE;TEST

(Ends bar code command)

(Terminates Create Form mode)

(Prints form)

~NORMAL

5–34

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Codabar

The Codabar structure is shown in Figure 5–4 and described on the following

pages.

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

SR, SC

POSITION

SR, SC

POSITION

STOP

CODE

STOP

CODE

OPTIONAL

CHECK

DIGIT

OPTIONAL

CHECK

DIGIT

DATA

FIELD

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

START

CODE

START

CODE

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

HEIGHT

OPTIONAL

CHECK DIGIT

SR, SC

POSITION

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

UPPER GUARD BAND

HEIGHT

QUIET START

STOP QUIET

CODE ZONE

DATA FIELD

ZONE

CODE

LOWER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL

CHECK DIGIT

SR, SC

POSITION

UPPER GUARD BAND

DATA FIELD

QUIET START

STOP QUIET

CODE ZONE

HEIGHT

ZONE

CODE

LOWER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

Figure 5–4. Codabar Structure

Bar Codes

5–35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Quiet Zone

Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet

zones must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure

accurate reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes

from overlapping. Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the

quiet zones.

Start/Stop Codes

The start/stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing

end of the bar code. The start/stop code is automatically produced with

each bar code. The start/stop code structure permits bidirectional bar code

scanning.

Data Field

The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to

represent standard alphanumeric characters. Each wide or narrow bar or

space is one element; each character in the data field has nine elements.

The structure is three wide elements (bars or spaces) out of the nine total

elements which compose one character.

Readable Data

The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the

bar code data. It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol.

Check Digit

The optional modulo–43 check digit can be inserted into the bar code to

verify accurate scanning.

5–36

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Codabar Command Format

BARCODE

CODABAR [CD]; [VSCAN;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;L;] [DARK;] SR;

[(D)data field(D)]

[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]

STOP

BARCODE

The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.

CODABAR CD

Designates bar code type Codabar; enter CODABAR.

To calculate and plot the optional modulo–43 check

digit with the bar code symbol automatically, enter

CD.

VSCAN

Optional parameter to orient the bar code structure

vertically. To select a vertical bar code, enter VSCAN.

If VSCAN is not entered, the bar code is oriented

horizontally.

MAG

Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally expand)

the bar code symbol. The magnification default value

is X1. As required for scanning, enter a magnification

value to increase the magnification. Increasing the

magnification adjusts printed character density.

You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 5–4.

Hn[.m]

Optional parameter to adjust the overall height

(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol (including

the upper and lower 0.1– inch guard bands and any

human readable data). Height adjustments are made in

0.1–inch increments; enter H and a value from 4 to 99

to select height adjustments from 0.4 to 9.9 inches. The

default value is 0.9 inch.

.m is an additional number of dots for the bar code

height. (Dots are in the current dot scale.)

Bar Codes

5–37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BFn;L

Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code

data field location on a form and for designating the

length of the data field. With these parameters, the

actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically

provided during the Execute Form Mode; the data is

not specified during the Create Form Mode. To use this

field, perform the following steps:

a. Enter BF.

b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 255

to identify the bar code field. The SR and SC

parameters specify the exact location of the bar

code field identified by n.

c. Replace L with a number equaling the total

number of characters in the field. (The actual

data provided dynamically during the Execute

Form Mode can be less than L.)

d. The information for the data field is entered

dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.

(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code

Data” on page 4–55 in the “Commands”

chapter.) Do not use the data field parameter to

enter data when the BFn;L parameters are used.

However, refer to the data field description for

available characters.

DARK

Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar

codes. Enter DARK. Refer to Dark Printing on page

4–10 for more information.

Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a value

ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the

form. Character row or dot row is specified based on

the Scale command (page 4–88), or use the CP.DP

format (page 4–7).

5–38

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width

of the form. Character column or dot column is

specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or

use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).

The printable character (delimiter) identifying the start

and finish of the data field. Enter any printable

character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a

character used within the data. The same character

must be used at both ends of the data field, but it is not

printed with the data.

data field

Contains the bar code characters. A null data field (no

characters) is permitted. The length of the data field is

variable; however, the maximum length is usually

limited to 32 characters to minimize potential reading

errors.

PDF

Optional parameter to enable printing of the human

readable data field. Enter PDF to print the data field. If

the parameter is not used, the human readable data will

not print. This parameter is not allowed if a null data

field is specified.

LOC

Optional parameter to identify the location of the

printable data field. The default value is B, locating the

human readable data below the bar code. A locates the

printable data field above bar code. To compensate for

printing the 0.1–inch high data, the height of the bar

code body is reduced 0.1 inch.

FONT

Optional parameter to select the font for the human

readable data field. The default value is N, selecting

the normal ASCII 10 cpi font. Enter O to select the

OCR–A 10 cpi font; enter X to select the OCR–B 10

cpi type font.

STOP

Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP/PGL

continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If

STOP is not entered, an error message results.

Bar Codes

5–39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 5–12. Codabar Character Set

Character

Hex

Character

Hex

–

5–40

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Codabar Example

~CREATE;TEST;288

(Enter Create Form mode)

(Bar code command)

SCALE;CHAR

BARCODE

CODABAR;VSCAN;X1;H7;5;20

“A12345B”

PDF;B;N

(Printable data field)

STOP

(Ends bar code command)

(Terminates Create Form mode)

END

~EXECUTE;TEST

~NORMAL

Bar Codes

5–41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code 128B and Code 128C

The Code 128 structure is shown in Figure 5–5 and described on the

following pages.

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

SR, SC

POSITION

SR, SC

POSITION

STOP

CODE

STOP

CODE

CHECK

DIGIT

FIELD

CHECK

DIGIT

FIELD

DATA

FIELD

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

START

CODE

START

CODE

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

HEIGHT

CHECK DIGIT

FIELD

SR, SC

POSITION

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

UPPER GUARD BAND

HEIGHT

QUIET START

STOP QUIET

CODE ZONE

DATA FIELD

ZONE

CODE

LOWER GUARD BAND

CHECK DIGIT

FIELD

SR, SC

POSITION

UPPER GUARD BAND

DATA FIELD

QUIET START

STOP QUIET

CODE ZONE

HEIGHT

ZONE

CODE

LOWER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

Figure 5–5. Code 128 Structure

5–42

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Quiet Zone

Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet

zones must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure

accurate reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes

from overlapping. Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the

quiet zones.

Start/Stop Codes

The start/stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the bar code.

Each of the Code 128 subsets uses a unique start code and a common stop

code, both automatically provided by the IGP/PGL.

Code 128B Data Field

The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to

represent an extensive character set (96 ASCII characters and seven control

characters). The bars and spaces vary in width from one to four modules.

Each character consists of three bars and three spaces that total 11 modules.

Code 128C Data Field

The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to

represent 100 pairs of numeric digits (00 through 99) and 3 control

characters. The bars and spaces vary in width from 1 to 4 modules. Each

character consists of three bars and three spaces that total 11 modules.

Readable Data

The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the

bar code data. It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol.

Check Digit

The modulo–103 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the

bar code symbol. The check digit verifies accurate scanning. The start code

is included in the check digit algorithm.

Bar Codes

5–43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code 128 Command Format

BARCODE

C128B or C128C; [VSCAN;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;L;] [DARK;] SR;

SC [(D)data field(D)]

[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]

STOP

BARCODE

The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.

C128B or C12BC Designates bar code type Code 128; enter C128B or

C128C.

VSCAN

MAG

Optional parameter to orient the bar code structure

vertically. To select a vertical bar code, enter VSCAN.

If VSCAN is not entered, the bar code is oriented

horizontally.

Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally expand)

the bar code symbol. The magnification default value

is X1. Increasing the magnification adjusts printed

character density.

You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 5–4.

(You must specify 8 digits for MAG for variable ratio.)

Hn[.m]

Optional parameter to adjust the overall height

(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol (including

the upper and lower 0.1–inch guard bands and any

human readable data). Height adjustments are made in

0.1–inch increments; enter H and a value from 4 to 99

to select height adjustments from 0.4 to 9.9 inches. The

default value is 0.9 inch.

.m is an additional number of dots for the bar code

height. (Dots are in the current dot scale.)

BFn;L

Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code

data field location on a form and for designating the

length of the data field. With these parameters, the

actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically

provided during the Execute Form Mode; the data is

not specified during the Create Form Mode.

5–44

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To use this field, perform the following steps.

a. Enter BF.

b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 255

to identify the bar code field. The SR and SC

parameters specify the exact location of the bar

code field identified by n.

c. Replace L with a number equaling the total

number of characters in the field. (The actual

data provided dynamically during the Execute

Form Mode can be less than L.)

d. The information for the data field is entered

dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.

(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code

Data” on page 4–55 in the “Commands”

chapter.) Do not use the data field parameter to

enter data when the BFn;L parameters are used.

However, refer to the data field description for

available characters.

DARK

Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar

codes. Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on page

4–10 for more information.

Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a value

ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the

form. Character row or dot row is specified based on

the Scale command (page 4–88), or use the CP.DP

format (page 4–7).

Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width

of the form. Character column or dot column is

specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or

use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).

The printable character (delimiter) identifying the start

and finish of the data field. Enter any printable

character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a

character used within the data.

Bar Codes

5–45

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The same character must be used at both ends of the

data field, but it will not print with the data.

data field

Enter the data for the bar code. A null data field (no

characters) is permitted. Whenever a string of 6 or

more contiguous numeric digits are detected, the

IGP/PGL automatically inserts a Code C at the start of

the numeric string and outputs numeric digit pairs

packed into single bar code characters.

When the string is broken (non–numeric data or an

unpaired numeric digit occurs), the IGP/PGL

automatically inserts a Code B and returns to normal

C128B symbols. The length of the data field is

variable; however, the maximum length is usually

limited to 32 characters to minimize potential reading

errors. The data field can contain any of the characters

listed in Table 5–13 and Table 5–14, except the system

SFCC.

PDF

LOC

Optional parameter to enable printing of the human

readable data field. Enter PDF to print the data field. If

the parameter is not used, the human readable data will

not print. This parameter is not allowed if a null data

field was specified.

Optional parameter to identify the location of the

printable data field. The default value is B, locating the

human readable data below the bar code. A locates the

printable data field above bar code. To compensate for

printing the 0.1–inch high data, the height of the bar

code body is reduced 0.1 inch.

FONT

Optional parameter to select the font for the human

readable data field. The default value, N, selects the

normal ASCII 10 cpi font. Enter O to select the

OCR–A 10 cpi font; enter X to select the OCR–B 10

cpi type font.

STOP

Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP/PGL

continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If

STOP is not entered, an error message results.

5–46

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 5–13. Code 128B Character Set

Character Hex

Character

Hex

[

;

”

’

{

(

)

]

–

‘

–

}

FNC 3

23 See NOTE

22 See NOTE

28 See NOTE

27 See NOTE

24 See NOTE

25 See NOTE

21 See NOTE

(N/A)

FNC 2

SHIFT

CODE C

FUNC 4

CODE A

FNC 1

START B

STOP

(N/A)

NOTE:

Access for the alternate set of control function characters is by using SO

(Shift Out, hex 0E). The SO control code identifies the next character as the

control function character, which must be inserted before each alternate

character required.

Bar Codes

5–47

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 5–14. Code 128C Character Set

Character

Hex

Character

Hex

Character

Hex

Character

Hex

30 30

30 31

30 32

30 33

30 34

30 35

30 36

30 37

30 38

30 39

31 30

31 31

31 32

31 33

31 34

31 35

31 36

31 37

31 38

31 39

32 30

32 31

32 32

32 33

32 34

32 35

32 36

32 37

32 38

32 39

33 30

33 31

33 32

33 33

33 34

33 35

33 36

33 37

33 38

33 39

34 30

34 31

34 32

34 33

34 34

34 35

34 36

34 37

34 38

34 39

35 30

35 31

35 32

35 33

35 34

35 35

35 36

35 37

35 38

35 39

36 30

36 31

36 32

36 33

36 34

36 35

36 36

36 37

36 38

36 39

37 30

37 31

37 32

37 33

37 34

37 35

37 36

37 37

37 38

37 39

38 30

38 31

38 32

38 33

38 34

38 35

38 36

38 37

38 38

38 39

39 30

39 31

39 32

39 33

39 34

39 35

39 36

39 37

39 38

39 39

CODE B

26 See NOTE

CODE A

FNC 1

25 See NOTE

21 See NOTE

(N/A)

START

STOP

(N/A)

NOTE:

Access for the alternate set of control function characters is by using SO

(Shift Out, hex 0E). The SO control code identifies the next character as the

control function character, and must be inserted before each alternate

character required.

5–48

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code 128B Example

Figure 5–6 illustrates a horizontal and vertical Code 128B bar code generated

by the following program:

~CREATE;128B

BARCODE

(Enter Create Form Mode)

(Bar Code command)

C128B;DARK;40;15

(Dark Code 128B at SR 40, SC 15)

*SAMPLE CODE 128B* (Data Field)

PDF;A

(Upper Printable Data Field)

STOP

(Ends Bar Code command)

(New Bar Code command)

BARCODE

C128B;VSCAN;H12;DARK;31;55

(Vert. Dark C128B, H 1.2 at SR 31, SC 55)

*SAMPLE CODE 128B* (Data Field)

PDF

(Printable Data Field)

STOP

(Ends Bar Code command)

END

(Terminate Create Form Mode)

(Execute the form, form count of 1)

~EXECUTE;128B;1

SC 55

SR 31

SC 15

SR 40

CODE128B.EX

Figure 5–6. Sample Code 128B Bar Codes

Bar Codes

5–49

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code 128C Example

Figure 5–7 illustrates a horizontal and vertical Code 128C bar code generated

by the following program:

~CREATE;128C

BARCODE

C128C;DARK;35;15

*1234567890*

PDF

(Enter Create Form Mode)

(Bar Code command)

(Dark Code 128C at SR 35, SC 15)

(Data Field)

(Printable Data Field)

STOP

(Ends Bar Code command)

(New Bar Code command)

BARCODE

C128C;VSCAN;H12;DARK;27;50

(Vert. Dark C128C, H 1.2 at SR 27, SC 50)

*1234567890*

PDF

(Data Field)

(Printable Data Field)

STOP

(Ends Bar Code command)

(Terminates Create Form Mode)

(Execute the form, form count of 1)

END

~EXECUTE;128C;1

SC 50

SR 27

SC 15

SR 35

CODE128C.EX

Figure 5–7. Sample Code 128C Bar Codes

5–50

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code UCC –128

The Code UCC–128 structure is shown in Figure 5–8 and described on the

following pages.

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

SR, SC

POSITION

SR, SC

POSITION

STOP

CODE

STOP

CODE

CHECK

DIGIT

FIELD

CHECK

DIGIT

FIELD

DATA

FIELD

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

START

CODE

START

CODE

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

HEIGHT

CHECK DIGIT

FIELD

SR, SC

POSITION

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

UPPER GUARD BAND

HEIGHT

QUIET START

ZONE CODE

STOP QUIET

CODE ZONE

DATA FIELD

LOWER GUARD BAND

CHECK DIGIT

FIELD

SR, SC

POSITION

UPPER GUARD BAND

DATA FIELD

QUIET START

ZONE CODE

STOP QUIET

CODE ZONE

HEIGHT

LOWER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

Figure 5–8. Code UCC–128 Structure

Bar Codes

5–51

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Quiet Zone

Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet

zones must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure

accurate reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes

from overlapping. Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the

quiet zones.

Start/Stop Codes

The start/stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the bar code.

Each of the Code UCC–128 subsets uses a unique start code and a common

stop code, both automatically provided by the IGP/PGL.

Data Field

The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to

represent 100 pairs of numeric digits (00 through 99) and 3 control

characters. The bars and spaces vary in width from 1 to 4 modules. Each

character consists of three bars and three spaces that total 11 modules.

The IGP/PGL inserts a Function 1 character before the data. A mod–10

check digit is calculated from 19 digits that represents a 2–digit qualifier,

and 17–digit data portion.

Readable Data

The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the

bar code data. It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol,

appears in 13 CPI, and is broken up by spaces to denote UCC–128 data

fields.

Check Digit

The modulo–10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the

bar code symbol. The check digit verifies accurate scanning. The start code

is included in the check digit algorithm.

The modulo–103 check digit is also automatically calculated and inserted

in the bar code symbol. The check digit verifies accurate scanning. The

start code is included in the check digit algorithm.

5–52

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code UCC–128 Command Format

BARCODE

UCC–128; [VSCAN;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn] [DARK;] SR; SC

[(D)data field(D)]

[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]

STOP

BARCODE

UCC–128

The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.

Designates bar code type Code UCC–128; enter

UCC–128.

VSCAN

Optional parameter to orient the bar code structure

vertically. To select a vertical bar code, enter VSCAN.

If VSCAN is not entered, the bar code is oriented

horizontally.

MAG

Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally expand)

the bar code symbol. The magnification default value

is X1. Increasing the magnification adjusts printed

character density.

You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 5–4.

(You must specify 8 digits for MAG for variable ratio.)

Hn[.m]

Optional parameter to adjust the overall height

(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol (including

the upper and lower 0.1–inch guard bands and any

human readable data).

Height adjustments are made in 0.1–inch increments;

enter H and a value from 4 to 99 to select height

adjustments from 0.4 to 9.9 inches. The default value is

0.9 inch.

.m is an additional number of dots for the bar code

height. (Dots are in the current dot scale.)

Bar Codes

5–53

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BFn

Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code

data field location on a form and for designating the

length of the data field. With these parameters, the

actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically

provided during the Execute Form Mode; the data is

not specified during the Create Form Mode.

To use this field, perform the following steps:

a. Enter BF.

b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 255

to identify the bar code field. The SR and SC

parameters specify the exact location of the bar

code field identified by n.

c. The length of the data field need not be

specified, since it is fixed at 19 digits, plus any

add–on data.

d. The information for the data field is entered

dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.

(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code

Data” on page 4–55 in the “Commands”

chapter.) Do not use the data field parameter to

enter data when the BFn parameters are used.

However, refer to the data field description for

available characters.

DARK

Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar

codes. Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on page

4–10 for more information.

Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a value

ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the

form. Character row or dot row is specified based on

the Scale command (page 4–88), or use the CP.DP

format (page 4–7).

Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width

of the form. Character column or dot column is

specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or

use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).

5–54

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The printable character (delimiter) identifying the start

and finish of the data field. Enter any printable

character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a

character used within the data. The same character

must be used at both ends of the data field, but it will

not print with the data.

data field

Enter the characters for the bar code data, restricted to

exactly 19 digits. Enter the Packaging Type Number,

followed by the 7 digit Manufacturing Number

(including Number System Character preceded by zero

if a UPC number). Enter the 9 digit Shipping Container

Serial Number. The characters available for the data

field are 0 through 9 (30 through 39 hex, respectively).

PDF

Optional parameter to enable printing of the human

readable data field. Enter PDF to print the data field. If

the parameter is not used, the human readable data will

not print. This parameter is not allowed if a null data

field was specified.

LOC

Optional parameter to identify the location of the

printable data field. The default value is B, locating the

human readable data below the bar code. A locates the

printable data field above bar code. To compensate for

printing the 0.1–inch high data, the height of the bar

code body is reduced 0.1 inch.

STOP

Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP/PGL

continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If

STOP is not entered, an error message results.

NOTE:

Refer to the Code 128C Character Set Table on page 5–48, for information

on character sets.

Bar Codes

5–55

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code UCC–128 Example

Figure 5–9 illustrates a horizontal and vertical Code UCC–128 bar code

generated by the following program:

~CREATE;UCC–128

BARCODE

(Enter Create Form Mode)

(Bar Code command)

UCC–128;DARK;35;15

(Dark Code UCC–128 at SR 35, SC 15)

*1234567890123456789* (Data Field)

PDF

(Printable Data Field)

STOP

(Ends Bar Code command)

(New Bar Code command)

BARCODE

UCC–128;VSCAN;H12;DARK;27;50

(Vert. Dark UCC–128, H 1.2 at SR 27, SC 50)

*1234567890123456789* (Data Field)

PDF

(Printable Data Field)

STOP

(Ends Bar Code command)

END

(Terminates Create Form Mode)

(Execute the form, form count of 1)

~EXECUTE;UCC–128;1

SC 50

SR 27

SC 15

SR 35

Note: When using the PDF (printable data field)

parameter, 13 cpi is the only option available.

CODEUCC128.ex

Figure 5–9. Sample Code UCC-128 Bar Codes

5–56

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EAN 8

The EAN 8 bar code structure is shown in Figure 5–10 and described on the

following pages.

SR, SC

POSITION

CENTER CODE

START CODE

STOP CODE

QUIET

ZONE

LEFT DATA

FIELD

RIGHT DATA

FIELD

QUIET

ZONE

2– or 5–

DIGIT

ADD–ON

CODE

HEIGHT

OPTIONAL READABLE

DATA FIELD

CHECK DIGIT FIELD

SR, SC

POSITION

QUIET

ZONE

2– or 5–

DIGIT

ADD–ON

CODE

QUIET

ZONE

HEIGHT

LEFT DATA

FIELD

RIGHT DATA

FIELD

STOP CODE

START CODE

CENTER CODE

2– or 5–

DIGIT

ADD–ON

CODE

DIGIT

ADD–ON

CODE

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

SR, SC

POSITION

SR, SC

POSITION

STOP

CODE

STOP

CODE

CHECK

DIGIT

FIELD

CHECK

DIGIT

FIELD

RIGHT

DATA

RIGHT

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

READABLE

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

CENTER

CODE

CENTER

CODE

DATA

FIELD

LEFT

DATA

FIELD

LEFT

DATA

FIELD

START

CODE

START

CODE

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

HEIGHT

Figure 5–10. EAN 8 Structure

Bar Codes

5–57

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Quiet Zone

Both ends of the bar code structure have blank quiet zones. The quiet zones

must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate

reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from

overlapping. The IGP/PGL automatically produces the left quiet zone; be

sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the right quiet zone.

Start/Center/Stop Codes

The start/center/stop codes are special character codes marking those

portions of the bar code. These codes are automatically provided.

Data Field

The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to

represent a limited character set (numbers 0–9 and Special Characters Start,

Center, and Stop). The bars and spaces vary in width from one to four

modules. Each character consists of two bars and two spaces that total

seven modules. The symbol coding of the left data field is different from

the right data field to permit read direction sensing.

The optional 2– or 5–digit add–on data, placed within the delimiter at the

end of the bar code, typically identifies a periodical issue number or price,

respectively.

Readable Data

The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar

code data. It can either be suppressed or printed below the bar code symbol.

Check Digit

The modulo–10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the

bar code symbol. The check digit verifies accurate scanning.

5–58

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EAN 8 Command Format

BARCODE

EAN8 [+n]; [VSCAN;] [SCB;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;] [DARK;] SR;

[(D)data field(D)]

[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]

STOP

BARCODE

EAN8

The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.

Designates bar code type EAN 8; enter EAN8.

Optional parameter to provide a 2– or 5–digit add–on

code at the end of the bar code data field. Enter a plus

sign (+) and a value of 2 or 5. The first bar of the

add–on code is separated by nine modules from the last

bar of the EAN symbol and a left guard pattern.

No center or right guard pattern exists.

VSCAN

Optional parameter to orient the bar code structure

vertically. To select a vertical bar code, enter VSCAN.

If VSCAN is not entered, the bar code is oriented

horizontally.

SCB

This option shortens the length of the center guard

bars, which are normally full length.

MAG

Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally expand)

the bar code symbol. The magnification default value

is X1.

You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 5–4.

(You must specify 8 digits for MAG for variable ratio.)

Hn[.m]

Optional parameter to adjust the overall height

(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol (including

the upper and lower 0.1–inch guard bands and any

human readable data).

Bar Codes

5–59

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Height adjustments are made in 0.1–inch increments;

enter H and a value from 4 to 99 to select height

adjustments from 0.4 to 9.9 inches. The default value is

1.3 inches.

.m is an additional number of dots for the bar code

height. (Dots are in the current dot scale.)

BFn

Optional parameter for assigning a dynamic bar code

data field location on a form. With this parameter, the

actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically

provided during the Execute Form Mode; the data is

not specified during the Create Form Mode. To use this

field:

a. Enter BF.

b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 255

to identify the bar code field. The SR and SC

parameters specify the exact location of the bar

code field identified by n.

c. The length of the data field need not be specified

since it is fixed at seven digits, plus any add–on

data.

d. The information for the data field is entered

dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.

(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code

Data” on page 4–55 in the “Commands”

chapter.) Do not use the data field parameter to

enter data when the BFn parameters are used.

However, refer to the data field description for

available characters.

DARK

Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar

codes. Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on page

4–10 for more information.

5–60

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a value

ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the

form. Character row or dot row is specified based on

the Scale command (page 4–88), or use the CP.DP

format (page 4–7).

Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width

of the form. Character column or dot column is

specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or

use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).

The printable character (delimiter) identifying the start

and finish of the data field. Enter any printable

character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a

character used within the data. The same character

must be used at both ends of the data field, but it will

not print with the data.

data field

The characters of the bar code data are restricted to

exactly seven digits. If the 2– or 5–digit add–on data

option is used, include this data at the end of the data

field. The characters available for the data field are 0

through 9 (30 through 39 hex, respectively).

PDF

Optional parameter to print the human readable data

field. The data field prints automatically unless the

PDF–suppress command is specified in the FONT

parameter. The human-readable data field can be

printed above or below the bar code symbol.

This parameter is not allowed if a null data field is

specified. If no PDF command is entered, the data

field will print automatically in the default OCR–B

font.

LOC

Optional parameter to identify the location of the

printable data field. The default value is B, locating the

human readable data below the bar code. A locates the

printable data field above bar code. To compensate for

printing the 0.1–inch high data, the height of the bar

code body is reduced 0.1 inch.

Bar Codes

5–61

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FONT

Optional parameter to select the font for the human

readable data field. The default value, N, selects the

normal ASCII 10 cpi font. Enter O to select the

OCR–A 10 cpi font; enter X to select the OCR–B type

font. Enter S to suppress printing the data field and the

trailing lower portions of the EAN bar code.

STOP

Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP/PGL

continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If

STOP is not entered, an error message results.

5–62

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EAN 8 Example

Figure 5–11 illustrates a horizontal and vertical EAN 8 bar code generated by

the following program:

~CREATE;EAN8

BARCODE

(Enter Create Form Mode)

(Bar Code command)

EAN8+2;H9;DARK;33;15 (Dark Code EAN 8, 2–digit add–on,

H 0.9, SR 33, SC 15)

*123456722*

PDF

(Data Field plus 2–digit add–on Data Field)

(Printable Data Field)

STOP

(Ends Bar Code command)

(New Bar Code command)

BARCODE

EAN8+2;VSCAN;H10;DARK;33;55

(Vertical Dark EAN 8, 2–digit add–on,

H 1.0, SR 33, SC 55)

*123456722*

PDF

(Data Field plus 2–digit add–on Data Field)

(Printable Data Field)

STOP

(Ends Bar Code command)

END

(Terminates Create Form Mode)

(Execute the form, form count of 1)

~EXECUTE;EAN8;1

SC 55

SC 15

SR 33

EAN8.EX

Figure 5–11. Sample EAN 8 Bar Codes

Bar Codes

5–63

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EAN 13

The EAN 13 bar code structure is shown in Figure 5–12 and described on the

following pages.

SR, SC

POSITION

CENTER CODE

START CODE

STOP CODE

QUIET

ZONE

LEFT DATA

FIELD

RIGHT DATA

FIELD

QUIET

ZONE

2– or 5–

DIGIT

ADD–ON

CODE

HEIGHT

NUMBER

SYSTEM

CHARACTER

OPTIONAL READABLE

DATA FIELD

CHECK DIGIT FIELD

SR, SC

POSITION

QUIET

ZONE

2– or 5–

DIGIT

ADD–ON

CODE

QUIET

ZONE

HEIGHT

LEFT DATA

FIELD

RIGHT DATA

FIELD

NUMBER

SYSTEM

CHARACTER

STOP CODE

START CODE

CENTER CODE

2– or 5–

DIGIT

ADD–ON

CODE

DIGIT

ADD–ON

CODE

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

SR, SC

POSITION

STOP

CODE

STOP

CODE

CHECK

DIGIT

FIELD

CHECK

DIGIT

FIELD

RIGHT

DATA

RIGHT

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

READABLE

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

CENTER

CODE

CENTER

CODE

DATA

FIELD

LEFT

DATA

FIELD

LEFT

DATA

FIELD

START

CODE

START

CODE

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

NUMBER

SYSTEM

CHARACTER

NUMBER

SYSTEM

CHARACTER

HEIGHT

Figure 5–12. EAN 13 Structure

5–64

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Quiet Zone

Quiet zones extend on both ends of the bar code to permit the scan to begin

and end in a blank area. The IGP/PGL automatically produces an 11-

module-wide left quiet zone; you are responsible for providing sufficient

space (minimum of seven modules) on the form for the right quiet zone.

The number system character is also printed automatically in the left quiet

zone.

Start/Center/Stop Codes

The start/center/stop codes are special character codes marking those

portions of the bar code. These codes are automatically provided.

Number System Character

The number system character field allows you to provide a code to a class

or type of item. The first character in the data field is used as the number

system character.

Data Field

The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to

represent a limited character set (numbers 0–9 and Special Characters Start,

Center, and Stop). The bars and spaces vary in width from one to four

modules. Each character consists of two bars and two spaces that total

seven modules. The symbol coding of the left data field is different from

the right data field to permit read direction sensing.

The optional 2– or 5–digit add–on data field is placed within the delimiter

at the end of the bar code data and typically identifies a periodical issue

number or price, respectively.

Readable Data

The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar

code data. It can either be suppressed or printed below the bar code symbol.

Check Digit

The modulo–10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the

bar code symbol. The check digit verifies accurate scanning. The number

system character is included in the check digit algorithm.

Bar Codes

5–65

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EAN 13 Command Format

BARCODE

EAN13 [+n]; [VSCAN;] [SCB;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;] [DARK;] SR;

[(D)data field(D)]

[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]

STOP

BARCODE

EAN13

The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.

Designates bar code type EAN 13; enter EAN13.

Optional parameter to provide a 2– or 5–digit add–on

code at the end of the bar code data field. Enter a plus

sign (+) and a value of 2 or 5. The first bar of the

add–on code is separated by nine modules from the last

bar of the EAN symbol and a left guard pattern. No

center or right guard pattern exists.

VSCAN

Optional parameter to orient the bar code structure

vertically. To select a vertical bar code, enter VSCAN.

If VSCAN is not entered, the bar code is oriented

horizontally.

SCB

This option shortens the length of the center guard

bars, which are normally full length.

MAG

Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally expand)

the bar code symbol. The magnification default value

is X1. Increasing the magnification adjusts printed

character density.

You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 5–4.

(You must specify 8 digits for MAG for variable ratio.)

5–66

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Hn[.m]

Optional parameter to adjust the overall height

(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol (including

the upper and lower 0.1–inch guard bands and any

human readable data). Height adjustments are made in

0.1–inch increments; enter H and a value from 4 to 99

to select height adjustments from 0.4 to 9.9 inches. The

default value is 1.3 inches.

.m is an additional number of dots for the bar code

height. (Dots are in the current dot scale.)

BFn

Optional parameter for assigning a dynamic bar code

data field location on a form. With this parameter, the

actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically

provided during the Execute Form Mode; the data is

not specified during the Create Form Mode. To use this

field, perform the following steps:

a. Enter BF.

b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 255

to identify the bar code field. The SR and SC

parameters specify the exact location of the bar

code field identified by n.

c. The length of the data field need not be

specified, since it is fixed at 12 digits, plus any

add–on data.

d. The information for the data field is entered

dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.

(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code

Data” on page 4–55 in the “Commands”

chapter.) Do not use the data field parameter to

enter data when the BFn parameters are used.

However, refer to the data field description for

available characters.

DARK

Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar

codes. Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on page

4–10 for more information.

Bar Codes

5–67

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a value

ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the

form. Character row or dot row is specified based on

the Scale command (page 4–88), or use the CP.DP

format (page 4–7).

Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width

of the form. Character column or dot column is

specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or

use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).

The printable character (delimiter) identifying the start

and finish of the data field. Enter any printable

character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a

character used within the data. The same character

must be used at both ends of the data field, but it is not

printed with the data.

data field

Enter the characters of the bar code data, restricted to

exactly 12 digits. If the 2– or 5–digit add–on data

option is used, include this data at the end of the data

field. The characters available for the data field are 0

through 9 (30 through 39 hex, respectively). The first

character is interpreted as the number system character.

The left side of the data field (or lower side on

vertically oriented symbols) can be encoded in either

format A or format B as determined by the value of the

number system character. (A bar code character is not

produced for the number system character.)

The number system character is derived from the left

side data field encoding. The right side of the data field

(or upper side on vertically oriented symbols) and

check digit are always encoded in format C.

Table 5–15 defines the left side data field format based

on the number system character.

5–68

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PDF

Optional parameter which affects printing of the

human readable data field. The data field will print

automatically in the OCR–B font (default) unless the

PDF–suppress command is specified in the FONT

parameter. The human-readable data field can be

printed above or below the bar code symbol. This

parameter is not allowed if a null data field is

specified.

LOC

Optional parameter to identify the location of the

printable data field. The default value is B, locating the

human readable data below the bar code. A locates the

printable data field above bar code. To compensate for

printing the 0.1–inch high data, the height of the bar

code body is reduced 0.1 inch.

FONT

STOP

Optional parameter to select the font for the human

readable data field. The default value, N, selects the

normal ASCII 10 cpi font. Enter O to select the

OCR–A 10 cpi font; enter X to select the OCR–B type

font; enter S to suppress printing the data field and the

trailing lower portions of the EAN bar code.

Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP/PGL

continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If

STOP is not entered, an error message results.

Table 5–15. Left Side Data Field Format

Format for Left Side Data Field Positions

Number System

CharacterValue

Bar Codes

5–69

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EAN 13 Example

Figure 5–13 illustrates a horizontal and vertical EAN 13 bar code generated

by the following program:

~CREATE;EAN13

BARCODE

(Enter Create Form Mode)

(Bar Code Command)

EAN13+5;DARK;28;15

(Dark Code EAN 13, 5–digit add on,

at SR 28, SC 15)

*12345678987655555*

(Data Field plus 5–digit add–on Data Field)

(Printable Data Field)

PDF

STOP

(Ends Bar Code command)

(New Bar Code command)

BARCODE

EAN13+5;VSCAN;H12;DARK;27;39

(Vertical Dark EAN 13, 2–digit add on, H 1.2,

at SR 27, SC 39)

*12345678987655555*

(Data Field plus 5–digit add on Data Field)

(Printable Data Field)

PDF

STOP

(Ends Bar Code command)

(Terminates Create Form Mode)

(Execute the form, form count of 1)

END

~EXECUTE;EAN13;1

SC 39

SC 15

SR 27

SR 28

EAN13.EX

Figure 5–13. Sample EAN 13 Bar Codes

5–70

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FIM

The FIM (Facing Identification Mark) bar code structure is shown in

Figure 5–14 and Figure 5–15 and described on the following pages. The left

boundary must begin 3 inches from the right edge of the mail piece. The

right–most bar must be 2 inches ± 1/8–inch from the right edge of the mail

piece. Bars must be 5/8–inch ± 1/8–inch tall; the top of the bars must be no

lower than 1/8–inch from the top edge of the mail piece (and may touch the

top edge of the mail piece). The bar code baseline must be within 1/8–inch

from the bottom edge of the clear zone.

SR, SC

POSITION

3”

NOTE: Illustration is not to scale

Return Address Area

2”– 1–7/8”

1–3/4”

1–1/4”

1/8”

5/8”

Clear

Zone

(Optional Line) NON–ADDRESS DATA

(Top Line) NAME OF RECIPIENT

(Optional Line) INFORMATION/ATTENTION LINE

(Line Above Last) DELIVERY ADDRESS

(Last Line) POST OFFICE STATE ZIP

Figure 5–14. FIM Structure

Bar Codes

5–71

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1–3/4”

SR, SC

POSITION

3”

1/8” Clear

Zone

1–1/4”

5/8”

opLine)

(satLine)

AobveLast)

(

(OptoalLine)

(iLne

NOET:Iuirntosceal

Figure 5–15. FIM Structure (VSCAN)

NOTE: Additional information regarding FIM bar code requirements can be

obtained from the U.S. Postal Service’s Publication 25: A Guide to

Business Mail Preparation.

5–72

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Clear Zone

The bar code structure requires a completely blank, 1/4–inch wide,

5/8–inch tall clear zone, reserved for only the appropriate FIM pattern. Be

sure to provide sufficient space for this zone.

Start/Stop Code

The start/stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing

end of the bar code. The start/stop code is automatically produced with

each bar code. The start/stop code structure permits bidirectional bar code

scanning.

Data Field

The bar code symbol uses a nine–position bar/no–bar pattern of tall (full)

bars of uniform height. Minimum height must be 5/8– inch ± 1/8–inch.

(Bar height may be longer to wrap around the top of the envelope.)

Minimum bar width is .031–inch ± .008–inch. Spacing (pitch) between

each bar/no–bar must be 1/16–inch. Bar tilt (slant) can vary ± 5 degrees

(relative to a line perpendicular to the top edge of the envelope).

Bar Codes

5–73

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FIM Command Format

BARCODE

FIM; [VSCAN;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;] [DARK;] SR; SC

[(D)data field(D)]

STOP

BARCODE

FIM

The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.

Designates bar code type FIM; enter FIM.

VSCAN

Optional parameter to orient the bar code structure

vertically. To select a vertical bar code, enter VSCAN.

If VSCAN is not entered, the bar code is oriented

horizontally.

Hn[.m]

Optional parameter to adjust the overall height

(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol (including

the upper and lower 0.1–inch guard bands and any

human readable data).

Height adjustments are made in 0.1–inch increments;

enter H and a value from 6 to 99 to select height

adjustments from 0.6 to 9.9 inches. The default value is

0.6 inches.

.m is an additional number of dots for the bar code

height. (Dots are in the current dot scale.)

BFn

Optional parameter for assigning a dynamic bar code

data field location on a form. With this parameter, the

actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically

provided during the Execute Form Mode; the data is

not specified during the Create Form Mode.

To use this field, perform the following steps:

a. Enter BF.

b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 255

to identify the bar code field. The SR and SC

parameters specify the exact location of the bar

code field identified by n.

5–74

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c. The information for the data field is entered

dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.

(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code

Data” on page 4–55 in the “Commands”

chapter.) Do not use the data field parameter to

enter data when the BFn parameters are used.

Refer to the data field description for available

characters.

DARK

Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar

codes. Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on page

4–10 for more information.

Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a value

1/8–inch from the top edge of the mail piece. Character

row or dot row is specified based on the Scale

command (page 4–88), or use the CP.DP format (page

4–7).

data field

A single–character data field to designate one of four

available FIM patterns: A, B, C, or D. Based on your

application (check with your Postal Service for more

information), replace n with one of the following FIM

types:

A Used only on courtesy reply envelopes bearing a

preprinted POSTNET bar code (page 5–98); it

requires a luminescent stamp or meter mark to

be accepted in the facer/canceler.

Used on Business Reply Mail, Penalty Mail, and

Franked Mail without a preprinted POSTNET

bar code, and does not require luminescent

indicia.

C Used on Business Reply Mail, Penalty Mail, or

Franked Mail bearing a preprinted POSTNET

bar code (page 5–98).

D Used on OCR readable mail (usually courtesy

reply window envelopes) without a preprinted

POSTNET bar code.

STOP

Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP/PGL

continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If

STOP is not entered, an error message results.

Bar Codes

5–75

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FIM Example

Figure 5–16 below illustrates a horizontal FIMB bar code from the following

program without the POSTNET preprinted bar code (POSTNET is discussed

on page 5–98.)

~CREATE;FIMB

(Enter Create Form Mode)

(Alpha command)

ALPHA

23;11;0;0;*PRINTRONIX, INC.*

25;11;0;0;*ATTN: CUSTOMER SERVICE*

27;11;0;0;*P.O. BOX 19559*

29;11;0;0;*IRVINE, CA 92714–9559*

STOP

(Ends Alpha command)

BARCODE

FIM;DARK;15;22

*B*

(Bar Code command)

(Dark FIM Bar Code at SR 15, SC 22)

(Data field selecting FIMB Bar Code)

(Ends FIMB Bar Code command)

(Terminates Create Form Mode)

(Executes the form, form count of 1)

STOP

END

~EXECUTE;FIMB;1

SR 15

SC 22

FIMC.EX

Figure 5–16. Sample FIMB Bar Code

5–76

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Figure 5–17 illustrates a horizontal FIMC bar code generated by the

following program and bears the preprinted POSTNET bar code.

~CREATE;FIMC

ALPHA

(Enter Create Form Mode)

(Alpha command)

23;11;0;0;*PRINTRONIX, INC.*

25;11;0;0;*ATTN: CUSTOMER SERVICE*

27;11;0;0;*P.O. BOX 19559*

29;11;0;0;*IRVINE, CA 92714–9559*

STOP

(Ends Alpha command)

BARCODE

FIM;DARK;17;25

*C*

(Bar Code command)

(Dark FIM Bar Code at SR 17, SC 25)

(Data field selecting FIMC Bar Code)

(Ends Bar Code command)

STOP

BARCODE

(New Bar Code command)

POSTNET;DARK;33.3;15 (Dark POSTNET Bar Code at SR 33.3, SC 15)

*927149559*

STOP

(POSTNET data field)

(Ends POSTNET Bar Code command)

(Terminates Create Form Mode)

(Executes the form, form count of 1)

END

~EXECUTE;FIMC;1

SR 17

SC 25

SC 15

SR 33.3

FIMB.EX

Figure 5–17. Sample FIMC Bar Code

Bar Codes

5–77

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Interleaved 2/5 (I–2/5), German I–2/5

The I–2/5 bar code structure is shown in Figure 5–18 and described on the

following pages.

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

SR, SC

POSITION

SR, SC

POSITION

STOP

CODE

STOP

CODE

OPTIONAL

CHECK

DIGIT

OPTIONAL

CHECK

DIGIT

DATA

FIELD

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

START

CODE

START

CODE

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

HEIGHT

OPTIONAL

CHECK DIGIT

SR, SC

POSITION

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

UPPER GUARD BAND

HEIGHT

QUIET START

STOP QUIET

CODE ZONE

DATA FIELD

ZONE

CODE

LOWER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL

CHECK DIGIT

SR, SC

POSITION

UPPER GUARD BAND

QUIET START

STOP QUIET

CODE ZONE

DATA FIELD

HEIGHT

ZONE

CODE

LOWER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

Figure 5–18. I–2/5 Structure

5–78

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Quiet Zone

Both ends of the bar code structure have blank quiet zones. The quiet zones

must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate

reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from

overlapping. Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet

zones.

Start/Stop Codes

Unique start and stop codes permit bidirectional scanning. Both start and

stop codes contain bars and spaces. They are automatically produced.

Data Field

The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to

represent numeric characters. The structure is 2 wide elements (bars or

spaces) and 3 narrow elements. In the bar code, two characters are

interleaved (paired); bars are used to represent the first character in the pair

and spaces are used to represent the second character in the pair.

Readable Data

The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the

bar code data. It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol.

Check Digit

The modulo-10 check digit can be inserted into the bar code to verify

accurate scanning. For the German variation of I-2/5, the checksum digit is

always automatically calculated and inserted.

Bar Codes

5–79

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

I–2/5 Command Format

BARCODE

I–2/5 [CD]; [VSCAN;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;L;] [DARK;] SR; SC

[(D)data field(D)]

[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]

STOP

I–2/5 German Command Format

BARCODE

I25GERMAN; [VSCAN;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;L;] [DARK;] SR; SC

[(D) data field (D)]

[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]

STOP

BARCODE

I–2/5 CD

The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.

Designates bar code type Interleaved 2/5; enter I–2/5.

To calculate and plot the optional modulo–10 check

digit with the bar code symbol automatically, enter

CD. For the German variation of the bar code, enter

I25GERMAN, instead of I-2/5 (the checksum digit is

always automatically calculated for German I-2/5).

VSCAN

Optional parameter to orient the bar code structure

vertically. To select a vertical bar code, enter VSCAN.

If VSCAN is not entered, the bar code is oriented

horizontally.

MAG

Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally expand)

the bar code symbol. The magnification default value

is X1. For the German variation of the bar code, the

default magnification is X1A. As required for

scanning, enter a magnification value to increase the

magnification. Increasing the magnification adjusts

printed character density. You can also use XR or XRD

as defined on page 5–4.

5–80

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Hn[.m]

Optional parameter to adjust the overall height

(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol (including

the upper and lower 0.1–inch guard bands and any

human readable data).

Height adjustments are made in 0.1–inch increments;

enter H and a value from 4 to 99 to select height

adjustments from 0.4 to 9.9 inches. The default value is

0.9–inch.

.m is an additional number of dots for the bar code

height. (Dots are in the current dot scale.)

BFn;L

Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code

data field location on a form and for designating the

length of the data field. With these parameters, the

actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically

provided during the Execute Form Mode; the data is

not specified during the Create Form Mode. To use this

field, perform the following steps:

a. Enter BF.

b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 255

to identify the bar code field. The SR and SC

parameters specify the exact location of the bar

code field identified by n.

c. Replace L with a number equaling the total

number of characters in the field. (The actual

data provided dynamically during the Execute

Form Mode can be less than L.)

d. The information for the data field is entered

dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.

(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code

Data” on page 4–55 in the “Commands”

chapter.) Do not use the data field parameter to

enter data when the BFn;L parameters are used.

However, refer to the data field description for

available characters.

DARK

Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar

codes. Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on page

4–10 for more information.

Bar Codes

5–81

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a value

ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the

form. Character row or dot row is specified based on

the Scale command (page 4–88), or use the CP.DP

format (page 4–7).

Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width

of the form. Character column or dot column is

specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or

use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).

The printable character (delimiter) identifying the start

and finish of the data field. Enter any printable

character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a

character used within the data.

The same character must be used at both ends of the

data field, but it will not print with the data.

data field

Enter the characters for the bar code data. A null data

field (no characters) is permitted. The length of the

data field is variable; however, the maximum length is

usually limited to 32 characters to minimize potential

reading errors.

For German I-2/5, however, data length should be

either 11 or 13.

For regular I-2/5, an even number of characters is

required for the interleaving process. Consequently, if

an odd number of characters are entered in the data

field, a leading zero is added automatically.

The characters available for the data field are 0 through

9 (30 through 39 hex, respectively).

PDF

Optional parameter to enable printing of the human

readable data field. Enter PDF to print the data field. If

the parameter is not used, the human readable data is

not printed.

This parameter is not allowed if a null data field was

specified.

5–82

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LOC

Optional parameter to identify the location of the

printable data field. The default value is B, locating the

human readable data below the bar code. A locates the

printable data field above bar code.

To compensate for printing the 0.1–inch high data, the

height of the bar code body is reduced 0.1–inch.

FONT

Optional parameter to select the font for the human

readable data field. The default value, N, selects the

normal ASCII 10 cpi font. Enter O to select the

OCR–A 10 cpi font; enter X to select the OCR–B type

font.

STOP

Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP/PGL

continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If

STOP is not entered, an error message results.

I–2/5 Example

Figure 5–19 illustrates a horizontal and vertical I–2/5 bar code generated by

the following program:

~CREATE;I25

BARCODE

I–2/5;DARK;49;27

*24688642*

PDF;A

(Enter Create Form Mode)

(Bar Code command)

(Dark Code I–2/5, at SR 49, SC 27)

(Data Field)

(Upper Printable Data Field)

(Ends Bar Code command)

(New Bar Code command)

STOP

BARCODE

I–2/5;VSCAN;H12;DARK;44;52

(Vertical Dark I–2/5, H 1.2 at SR 44, SC 52)

*24688642*

PDF

(Data Field)

(Printable Data Field)

STOP

(Ends Bar Code command)

(Terminates Create Form Mode)

(Execute the form, form count of 1)

END

~EXECUTE;I25;1

Bar Codes

5–83

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SC 52

SR 44

SC 27

SR 49

I25.EX

Figure 5–19. Sample I–2/5 Bar Codes

5–84

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MSI

The MSI bar code structure is shown in Figure 5–20 and described on the

following pages.

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

SR, SC

POSITION

SR, SC

POSITION

STOP

CODE

STOP

CODE

CHECK

DIGIT

FIELD

CHECK

DIGIT

FIELD

DATA

FIELD

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

START

CODE

START

CODE

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

HEIGHT

CHECK DIGIT

FIELD

SR, SC

POSITION

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

UPPER GUARD BAND

HEIGHT

QUIET START

ZONE CODE

STOP QUIET

CODE ZONE

DATA FIELD

LOWER GUARD BAND

CHECK DIGIT

FIELD

SR, SC

POSITION

UPPER GUARD BAND

DATA FIELD

QUIET START

ZONE CODE

STOP QUIET

CODE ZONE

HEIGHT

LOWER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

Figure 5–20. MSI Structure

Bar Codes

5–85

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Quiet Zone

Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet

zones must be at least 0.25–inches wide and completely blank to ensure

accurate reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes

from overlapping. Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the

quiet zones.

Start/Stop Code

Unique start and stop codes permit bidirectional scanning. Both start and

stop codes contain bars and spaces. They are automatically produced.

Data Field

The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to

represent each numeric character. The structure is four wide elements (bars

or spaces) and four narrow elements. Each character contains four data bits,

with each 0–bit made up of a narrow bar/wide space arrangement and each

1–bit made up of a wide bar/narrow space arrangement.

Readable Data

The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the

bar code data. It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol.

Check Digit

If specified, the modulo–10 or modulo–11 (or both) check digit is

automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol. The check

digit verifies accurate scanning. A number system character is included in

the check digit algorithm.

5–86

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MSI Command Format

BARCODE

MSI n; [VSCAN;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;L;] [DARK;] SR; SC

[(D)data field(D)]

[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]

STOP

BARCODE

The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.

MSI

Designates bar code type MSI; enter MSI.

Designates the type of check digit combinations for the

bar code. Replace n with one of the following codes to

specify the check digit.

A single–digit modulo–10 followed by a second

modulo–10 digit

single–digit modulo–11 followed by a single

modulo–10 digit

C single–digit modulo–10

D single–digit modulo–11

VSCAN

Optional parameter to orient the bar code structure

vertically. To select a vertical bar code, enter VSCAN.

If VSCAN is not entered, the bar code is oriented

horizontally.

MAG

Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally expand)

the bar code symbol. The magnification default value

is X1. As required for scanning, enter a magnification

value to increase the magnification. Increasing the

magnification adjusts printed character density.

You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 5–4.

Hn[.m]

Optional parameter to adjust the overall height

(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol (including

the upper and lower 0.1–inch guard bands and any

human readable data). Height adjustments are made in

0.1–inch increments; enter H and a value from 4 to 99

to select height adjustments from 0.4 to 9.9 inches.

Bar Codes

5–87

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The default value is 0.9–inch. .m is an additional

number of dots for the bar code height. (Dots are in the

current dot scale.)

BFn;L

Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code

data field location on a form and for designating the

length of the data field. With these parameters, the

actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically

provided during the Execute Form Mode; the data is

not specified during the Create Form Mode. To use this

field:

a. Enter BF.

b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 255

to identify the bar code field. The SR and SC

parameters specify the exact location of the bar

code field identified by n.

c. Replace L with a number equaling the total

number of characters in the field. (The actual

data provided dynamically during the Execute

Form Mode can be less than L.)

d. The information for the data field is entered

dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.

(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code

Data” on page 4–55 in the “Commands”

chapter.) Do not use the data field parameter to

enter data when the BFn;L parameters are used.

However, refer to the data field description for

available characters.

DARK

Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar

codes. Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on page

4–10 for more information.

Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a value

ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the

form. Character row or dot row is specified based on

the Scale command (page 4–88), or use the CP.DP

format (page 4–7).

5–88

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width

of the form. Character column or dot column is

specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or

use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).

The printable character (delimiter) identifying the start

and finish of the data field. Enter any printable

character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a

character used within the data. The same character

must be used at both ends of the data field, but it will

not print with the data.

data field

Enter the characters for the bar code data. A null data

field (no characters) is permitted. The length of the

data field is variable; however, a maximum of 14 data

characters are allowed if a one–character check digit

field is specified; a maximum of 13 data characters are

allowed if a two–character check digit field is

specified.

The characters available for the data field are 0 through

9 (30 through 39 hex, respectively).

PDF

Optional parameter to enable printing of the human

readable data field. Enter PDF to print the data field. If

the parameter is not used, the human readable data will

not print.

LOC

Optional parameter to identify the location of the

printable data field. The default value is B, locating the

human readable data below the bar code. A locates the

printable data field above the bar code. To compensate

for printing the 0.1–inch high data, the height of the

bar code body is reduced 0.1–inch.

Bar Codes

5–89

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FONT

Optional parameter to select the font for the human

readable data field. The default value, N, selects the

normal ASCII 10 cpi font. Enter O to select the

OCR–A 10 cpi font; enter X to select the OCR–B type

font.

STOP

Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP/PGL

continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If

STOP is not entered, an error message results.

5–90

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MSI Example

Figure 5–21 illustrates a horizontal and vertical MSI bar code generated by

the following program:

~CREATE;MSI

BARCODE

MSIA;DARK;32;27

*24688642*

PDF;X

(Enter Create Form Mode)

(Bar Code command)

(Dark Bar Code MSIA at SR 32, SC 27)

(Data Field)

(Printable Data Field, OCR–B)

(Ends Bar Code command)

(New Bar Code command)

STOP

BARCODE

MSIB;VSCAN;X2;H12;DARK;32;54

(Vertical Dark MSIB, Mag 2, H 1.2 at SR 32, SC

54)

*24688642*

PDF;A

(Data Field)

(Upper Data Field)

STOP

(Ends Bar Code command)

(Terminates Create Form Mode)

(Execute the form, form count of 1)

END

~EXECUTE;MSI;1

SC 27

SC 54

SR 32

MSI.EX

Figure 5–21. Sample MSI Bar Codes

Bar Codes

5–91

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PDF417

The PDF417 structure is shown in Figure 5–22 and described on the

following pages.

SR, SC

POSITION

QUIET

ZONE

STOP

CODE

DATA

FIELD

START

CODE

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

QUIET

ZONE

SR, SC

POSITION

UPPER GUARD BAND

QUIET START

ZONE CODE

STOP QUIET

CODE ZONE

DATA FIELD

LOWER GUARD BAND

Figure 5–22. PDF417 Structure

5–92

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Quiet Zone

Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet

zones must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure

accurate reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes

from overlapping. Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the

quiet zones.

Start/Stop Codes

The start/stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the bar code.

Data Field

PDF417 provides twelve modes to encode data. The first three are

pre–established (the remaining nine are user modes, which can be defined

by users or industry associations according to specific applications):

1. Extended Alphanumeric Compaction mode (EXC). Comprised of four

sub–modes, this mode offers encodation of all printable ASCII

characters. This is the default mode; the PGL uses shift or latch

characters to enable other modes.

2. Binary/ASCII Plus mode. This offers encodation for all ASCII

characters, printable or not, and binary values.

3. Numeric Compaction mode. This offers encodation for numeric values

to a density of almost 3 digits per code word.

The PGL will automatically switch between modes to provide the smallest

encodation for the data.

Security Level

PDF417 can detect and correct errors. Each label has 2 code words of error

detection. You can select the error correction capacity based on application

needs. Specify a security level in the range of 0 – 8, at the time of printing.

PDF417 can also recover from omissions and misdecodes of code words.

Since it requires two code words to recover from a misdecode, one to detect

the error and one to correct for it, a given security level can support half the

number of misdecodes that it can of undecoded words.

PDF

Print Data Field is not offered due to the large amount of data that can be

encoded.

Bar Codes

5–93

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PDF417 Command Format

BARCODE

PDF417; [X[D]n;] [Y[D]n;] [(Hn)| (Wn);] [ASPECTh:w;] [(Rn)| (Cn);]

[Sn;][BFn;L;] [DARK;] SR; SC(T)

[(D)data field(D)(T)]

STOP (T)

BARCODE

PDF417

X[D]n

The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.

Designates bar code type PDF417; enter PDF417.

Optional parameter to designate the width of the

narrow element in either the default 60 x 72 dots per

inch or, if the D is given, in target dots. (The target dot

is 300 dpi for the T3308, T3306 and T3304 printer

models and 203 dpi for the T3204 printer model.) The

default size is 1/60th of an inch.

Y[D]n

Optional parameter to designate the height of the bar

code in either the default 60 X 72 dots per inch or, if

the D is given, in target dots. (The target dot is 300 dpi

for the T3308, T3306 and T3304 printer models and

203 dpi for the T3204 printer model.) The default size

is 2/72nd of an inch.

Optional parameter to adjust the overall height of the

bar code symbol (including human readable data).

Height adjustments are made in 0.1–inch increments;

enter H and a value from 4 to 99 to select height

adjustments from 0.4 to 9.9 inches. Parameters Wn,

Rn, Cn or ASPECT can not be entered if this

parameter is used.

Optional parameter for the maximum width of the

symbol based on the narrow element width. Enter Wn;

where n is the overall width in tenths of an inch.

Parameters Hn, Rn, Cn or ASPECT can not be entered

if this parameter is used.

5–94

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ASPECT;h:w

Optional parameter for specifying the symbol

height–to–width ratio where h is the height and w is

the width, both expressed as integers. The default is

1:2. Parameters Hn, Wn, Rn, or Cn cannot be entered if

this parameter is used.

Optional parameter that specifies the number of rows

the symbol will have. Enter R; followed by the number

of rows in the range of 3 to 90 in multiples of 3.

Parameters Hn, Wn, Cn or ASPECT can not be entered

if this parameter is used.

Optional parameter that specifies the number of

columns the symbol will have. Enter C; followed by

the number of columns in the range of 1 to 90.

Parameters Hn, Wn, Rn or ASPECT can not be entered

if this parameter is used.

Optional parameter that specifies the security level.

Enter S; followed by the security level in the range of

0–8. The default is 2.

BFn;L

Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code

data field location on a form and for designating the

length of the data field. With these parameters, the

actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically

provided during the Execute Form Mode; the data is

not specified during the Create Form Mode. To use this

field, perform the following steps:

a. Enter BF.

b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 255

to identify the bar code field. The SR and SC

parameters specify the exact location of the bar

code field identified by n.

c. Replace L with a number equaling the total

number of characters in the field. (The actual

data provided dynamically during the Execute

Form Mode can be less than L.)

Bar Codes

5–95

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

d. The information for the data field is entered

dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.

(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code

Data” on page 4–55 in the “Commands”

chapter.) Do not use the data field parameter to

enter data when the BFn;L parameters are used.

However, refer to the data field description for

available characters.

DARK

Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar

codes. Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on page

4–10 for more information.

Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a value

ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the

form. Character row or dot row is specified based on

the Scale command (page 4–88), or use the CP.DP

format (page 4–7).

Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width

of the form. Character column or dot column is

specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or

use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).

The printable character (delimiter) identifying the start

and finish of the data field. Enter any printable

character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a

character used within the data. The same character

must be used at both ends of the data field, but it will

not print with the data.

data field

Enter the data for the bar code. A null data field (no

characters) is not permitted. The data field can contain

any character including carriage returns and line feeds.

The length of the data field is variable; however, the

maximum length is usually limited to1024 bytes to

minimize potential reading errors.

NOTE: New lines (i.e. carriage returns/line feeds) are allowed in the

PDF417 data field and as PDF417 dynamic data field input.

5–96

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STOP

Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP/PGL

continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If

STOP is not entered, an error message results.

PDF417 Example

Figure 5–23 illustrates a horizontal PDF417 bar code generated by the

following program:

~CREATE;PDF417

BARCODE

(Enter Create Form Mode)

(Bar Code command)

PDF417;XD3;YD9;S0;7;21 (PDF417; width; height, security level, SR, SC)

*PRINTRONIX SUPPORTS PRINTING OF PDF417 TWO–DIMENSIONAL

BAR CODE SYMBOLOGY 123456789012345678901234567890123456789*

STOP

(Ends Bar Code command)

(Terminate Create Form Mode)

(Execute the form)

END

~EXECUTE;PDF

Figure 5–23. Sample PDF417 Bar Code

Bar Codes

5–97

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

POSTNET

The POSTNET bar code structure is illustrated in Figure 5–24 and

Figure 5–25 and described on the following pages. The POSTNET code can

be a part of the address block and appear anywhere within a vertical 4–inch

area across the length of the mailpiece.

Return Address Area

Postage Area

ADDRESS BLOCK BAR CODE READ AREA

4”

1/2”

SR, SC

POSITION

CLEAR ZONE

BAR CODE DATA FIELD

CLEAR ZONE

CLEAR

ZONE

CLEAR

ZONE

START

CODE

STOP

CODE

CHECK DIGIT

NOTE: Illustration is not to scale

Figure 5–24. POSTNET Structure

NOTE: Additional information regarding POSTNET bar code requirements

can be obtained from the U.S. Postal Service’s Publication 25: A

Guide to Business Mail Preparation.

5–98

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1/2”

CLEAR

ZONE

STOP

CODE

CHECK DIGIT

SR, SC

POSITION

BAR

CODE

DATA

FIELD

START

CODE

4”

CLEAR

ZONE

1/2”

NOTE: Illustration is not to scale

Figure 5–25. POSTNET Structure (VSCAN)

Bar Codes

5–99

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Clear Zone

The bar code structure requires a completely blank clear zone which

extends 4.75 inches from the right edge of the mailpiece. In addition, a

minimum clear zone of 0.040–inch above and below the bar code data must

also be provided. Be sure to provide sufficient space for this zone.

Start/Stop Code

The start and stop codes are referred to as “framing bars” in POSTNET.

The start and stop codes are each one tall bar, one identifying the leading

and trailing end of the bar code. The start/stop code is automatically

produced with each bar code. The start/stop code structure permits bar code

scanning in a left–to right direction only.

Data Field

The bar code data produces a single field of 30 bars for a 5–digit field, 50

bars for a 9–digit data field, or 60 bars for an 11–digit data field. The bars

are grouped in sets of five. Each set of five bars (comprised of two tall bars

and three short bars) represents one of the five digits of the zip code, plus

the four–digit zip code extension. If the Advanced Bar Code is used, an

additional two–digit code is also added to make an 11–digit data field.

Each bar width is equal, and must be .020–inch ± .005–inch. Each bar

height is either a tall (full) or short (half) bar, representing a 1 or 0,

respectively. Each tall bar must be .125–inch ± .010–inch; each short bar

must be .050–inch ± .010–inch. Horizontal spacing between bars (pitch)

must be 22 bars ± 2 bars per inch over any 0.50–inch portion of the bar

code.

Horizontal spacing at 24 and 20 bars per inch is 0.0416–inch and

.050–inch, respectively, with a clear vertical space ranging from 0.012–inch

to 0.040–inch between bars.

Check Digit

The sixth, tenth or twelfth digit represents the automatic check digit

character for the 5, 9 or 11–digit data field, respectively. The check digit is

added automatically to verify accurate scanning.

5–100

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

POSTNET Command Format

BARCODE

POSTNET; [VSCAN;] [BFn;L;] [DARK;] SR; SC

[(D)data field(D)]

STOP

BARCODE

POSTNET

VSCAN

The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.

Designates bar code type POSTNET; enter POSTNET.

Optional parameter to orient the bar code structure

vertically. To select a vertical bar code, enter VSCAN.

If VSCAN is not entered, the bar code is oriented

horizontally.

BFn;L

Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code

data field location on a form and for designating the

length of the data field. With these parameters, the

actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically

provided during the Execute Form Mode; the data is

not specified during the Create Form Mode. To use this

field, perform the following steps:

a. Enter BF.

b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 255

to identify the bar code field. The SR and SC

parameters specify the exact location of the bar

code field identified by n.

c. Replace L with a number equaling the total

number of characters in the field. The data field

must be numeric and contain exactly 5, 9 or 11

digits.

d. The information for the data field is entered

dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.

(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code

Data” on page 4–55 in the “Commands”

chapter.) Do not use the data field parameter to

enter data when the BFn parameters are used.

However, refer to the data field description for

available characters.

Bar Codes

5–101

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

e. Replace L with a number equaling the total

number of characters in the field. (The actual

data provided dynamically during the Execute

Form Mode can be less than L.)

f. The information for the data field is entered

dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.

(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code

Data” on page 4–55 in the “Commands”

chapter.) Do not use the data field parameter to

enter data when the BFn parameters are used.

However, refer to the data field description for

available characters.

DARK

Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar

codes. Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on page

4–10 for more information.

Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a value

within the range of the 4–inch vertical address block.

Character row or dot row is specified based on the

Scale command (page 4–88), or use the CP.DP format

(page 4–7).

Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a

value between the 1/2–inch left and right margins of

the mailpiece. Character column or dot column is

specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or

use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).

The printable character (delimiter) identifying the start

and finish of the data field. Enter any printable

character other than a slash (/) the SFCC, or a character

used within the data. The same character must be used

at both ends of the data field but it will not print with

the data.

data field

The bar code data. Enter 5 digits (for zip code), 9 digits

for a nine–digit zip code, or 11 digits (for the

Advanced Bar Code format). The available characters

for the data field are 0 through 9 (30 through 39 hex,

respectively).

5–102

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STOP

Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP/PGL

continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If

STOP is not entered, an error message will result.

Figure 5–26 illustrates a horizontal and vertical POSTNET bar code

generated by the following program:

~CREATE;POSTNET

BARCODE

(Enter Create Form Mode)

(Bar code command)

POSTNET;DARK;10;40

*601159912*

STOP

(Dark POSTNET bar code at SR 10, SC 40)

(ZIP + 4 data field 60115–9912)

(Ends Bar Code command)

(Terminates Create Form Mode)

(Enter Create Form Mode)

(Bar code command)

END

~CREATE;POSTNET

BARCODE

POSTNET;VSCAN;DARK;10;20

(Dark Vertical bar code POSTNET at SR 10, SC 40)

*601159912*

STOP

(ZIP + 4 data field 60115–9912)

(Ends Bar Code command)

END

(Terminates Create Form Mode)

~EXECUTE;POSTNET;1 (Execute the form, with a form count of 1)

SC 20

SR 10

SC 40

POSTNET.EX

Figure 5–26. Sample POSTNET Bar Codes

Bar Codes

5–103

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UPC–A

The UPC–A bar code structure is shown in Figure 5–27 and described on the

following pages.

SR, SC

POSITION

START CODE

CENTER CODE

STOP CODE

QUIET

ZONE

LEFT DATA

FIELD

RIGHT DATA

FIELD

QUIET

ZONE

2– or 5–

DIGIT

ADD–ON

CODE

HEIGHT

NUMBER

SYSTEM

CHARACTER

CHECK DIGIT

CHARACTER

CHECK DIGIT FIELD

NUMBER SYSTEM

CHARACTER FIELD

OPTIONAL READABLE

DATA FIELD

SR, SC

POSITION

QUIET

ZONE

2– or 5–

DIGIT

ADD–ON

CODE

QUIET

ZONE

HEIGHT

LEFT DATA

FIELD

RIGHT DATA

FIELD

NUMBER

SYSTEM

CHARACTER

STOP CODE

START CODE

CENTER

CODE

CHECK DIGIT

CHARACTER

CHECK DIGIT FIELD

2– or 5–

DIGIT

ADD–ON

CODE

2– or 5–

DIGIT

ADD–ON

CODE

CHECK

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

DIGIT

SR, SC

POSITION

SR, SC

POSITION

CHARACTER

STOP CODE

CHECK

DIGIT

FIELD

CHECK

DIGIT

FIELD

RIGHT

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

CENTER

CODE

CENTER CODE

FIELD

LEFT

DATA

FIELD

LEFT

DATA

FIELD

NUMBER

SYSTEM

CHARACTER

FIELD

SYSTEM

CHARACTER

FIELD

START CODE

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

NUMBER

SYSTEM

NUMBER

SYSTEM

CHARACTER

HEIGHT

Figure 5–27. UPC–A Structure

5–104

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Quiet Zone

Quiet zones extend on both ends of the bar code to permit the scan to begin

and end in a blank area. The IGP/PGL automatically produces an

11–module wide left quiet zone; you are responsible for providing

sufficient space (minimum of seven modules) on the form for the right

quiet zone. The number system character is also printed automatically in

the left quiet zone.

Start/Center/Stop Codes

The start/center/stop codes are special character codes marking those

portions of the bar code. These codes are automatically provided.

Number System Character

The number system character field allows you to provide a code to a class

or type of item. The first character in the data field is used as the number

system character.

Data Field

The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to

represent a limited character set (numbers 0–9 and Special Characters Start,

Center, and Stop). The bars and spaces vary in width from one to four

modules. Each character consists of two bars and two spaces that total

seven modules. The symbol coding of the left data field is different from

the right data field to permit read direction sensing.

The optional 2– or 5–digit add–on data field is placed at the end of the bar

code and typically identifies a periodical issue number or price,

respectively.

Readable Data

The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar

code data. It can either be suppressed or printed below the bar code symbol.

Check Digit

The modulo–10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the

bar code symbol. The check digit verifies accurate scanning. The number

system character is included in the check digit algorithm.

Bar Codes

5–105

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UPC–A Command Format

BARCODE

UPC–A [+n]; [VSCAN;] [SCB;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;] [DARK;] SR;

[(D)data field(D)]

[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]

STOP

BARCODE

UPC–A

The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.

Designates bar code type UPC–A; enter UPC–A.

Optional parameter to provide a 2– or 5–digit add–on

code at the end of the bar code data field. Enter a plus

sign (+) and a value of 2 or 5. The first bar of the

add–on code is separated by nine modules from the last

bar of the UPC symbol and a left guard pattern.

VSCAN

Optional parameter to orient the bar code structure

vertically. To select a vertical bar code, enter VSCAN.

If VSCAN is not entered, the bar code is oriented

horizontally.

SCB

This option shortens the length of the center guard

bars, which are normally full length.

MAG

Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally expand)

the bar code symbol. The magnification default value

is X1. Enter a magnification value to increase the

magnification. Increasing the magnification adjusts

printed character density.

You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 5–4.

(You must specify 8 digits for MAG for variable ratio.)

5–106

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Hn[.m]

Optional parameter to adjust the overall height

(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol (including

the upper and lower 0.1–inch guard bands and any

human readable data). Height adjustments are made in

0.1–inch increments; enter H and a value from 4 to 99

to select height adjustments from 0.4 to 9.9 inches. The

default value is 1.3 inches.

.m is an additional number of dots for the bar code

height. (Dots are in the current dot scale.)

BFn

Optional parameter for assigning a dynamic bar code

data field location on a form. With this parameter, the

actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically

provided during the Execute Form Mode; the data is

not specified during the Create Form Mode. To use this

field, perform the following steps:

a. Enter BF.

b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 255

to identify the bar code field. The SR and SC

parameters specify the exact location of the bar

code field identified by n.

c. The length of the data field need not be

specified, since it is fixed at 11 digits, plus any

add–on data.

d. The information for the data field is entered

dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.

(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code

Data” on page 4–55 in the “Commands”

chapter.) Do not use the data field parameter to

enter data when the BFn parameters are used.

However, refer to the data field description for

available characters.

DARK

Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar

codes. Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on page

4–10 for more information.

Bar Codes

5–107

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a value

ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the

form. Character row or dot row is specified based on

the Scale command (page 4–88), or use the CP.DP

format (page 4–7).

Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width

of the form. Character column or dot column is

specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or

use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).

The printable character (delimiter) identifying the start

and finish of the data field. Enter any printable

character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a

character used within the data. (It will not print with

the data.) Use the same character at both ends of the

data field.

data field

Enter the characters for the bar code data, restricted to

exactly 11 digits. If the 2– or 5–digit add–on data

option is used, include this data at the end of the data

field. The first digit is interpreted as the number system

character. The remaining 10 digits are the data field

characters. The characters available for the data field

are 0 through 9 (30 through 39 hex, respectively).

PDF

Optional parameter which affects printing of the

human readable data field. The data field will print

automatically unless the PDF–suppress command is

specified in the FONT parameter. OCR-B characters

can be printed above or below the bar code symbol.

This parameter is not allowed if a null data field is

specified. If the PDF command is not entered in the

UPC–A command format, the data field automatically

prints in OCR–B.

5–108

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LOC

Optional parameter to identify the location of the

printable data field. The default value is B, locating the

human readable data below the bar code. A locates the

printable data field above bar code. To compensate for

printing the 0.1–inch high data, the height of the bar

code body is reduced 0.1–inch.

FONT

Optional parameter to select the font for the human

readable data field. The default font type for UPC–A

bar codes is OCR–B; if no PDF command is entered in

the command format, the data field is printed

automatically in OCR–B. Entering X will also

designate the OCR–B type font. Enter N to select the

normal ASCII 10 cpi font; enter O to select the

OCR–A 10 cpi font. Enter S to suppress printing the

data field and the trailing lower portions of the UPC

bar code.

STOP

Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP/PGL

continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If

STOP is not entered, an error message results.

Bar Codes

5–109

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UPC–A Example

Figure 5–28 illustrates a horizontal and vertical UPC–A bar code generated

by the following program:

~CREATE;UPCA

BARCODE

(Enter Create Form Mode)

(Bar Code command)

UPC–A+5;H9;DARK;39;15 (Dark Code UPC–A, 5–digit add–on,

H 0.9, SR 39, SC 15)

*1234567887655555*

PDF

(Data Field plus 5–digit add–on data field)

(Printable Data Field)

STOP

(Ends Bar Code command)

(New Bar Code command)

BARCODE

UPC–A+5;VSCAN;H12;DARK;39;50

(Vertical Dark UPC–A, 5–digit add–on,

H 1.2, SR 39, SC 50)

*1234567887655555*

(Data Field plus 5–digit add–on data field)

(Printable Data Field)

PDF

STOP

(Ends Bar Code command)

END

(Terminates Create Form Mode)

(Executes the form, form count of 1)

~EXECUTE;UPCA;1

SC 50

SC 15

SR 39

UPC–A.EX

Figure 5–28. Sample UPC–A Bar Codes with Add–On Data

5–110

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UPC–E and UPC–E0

The UPC–E and UPC–E0 bar code structure is shown in Figure 5–29 and

described on the following pages.

START

CODE

DATA

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

2– or 5–

DIGIT

ADD–ON

CODE

CHECK

DIGIT

FIELD

HEIGHT

STOP

CODE

CHECK

DIGIT

CHARACTER

NUMBER

SYSTEM

CHARACTER

OPTIONAL

READABLE

NUMBER SYSTEM

CHARACTER FIELD DATA FIELD

STOP

CODE

SR, SC

POSITION

2– or 5–

DIGIT

ADD–ON

CODE

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

HEIGHT

CHECK

DIGIT

DATA

FIELD

CHECK DIGIT

CHARACTER

NUMBER SYSTEM

CHARACTER

2– or 5–

DIGIT

ADD–ON

CODE

2– or 5–

DIGIT

ADD–ON

CODE

CHECK

DIGIT

CHARACTER

CHECK

DIGIT

CHARACTER

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

SR, SC

POSITION

SR, SC

POSITION

STOP CODE

CHECK

DIGIT

CHECK

DIGIT

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

NUMBER

SYSTEM

CHARACTER

FIELD

NUMBER

SYSTEM

CHARACTER

FIELD

START CODE

NUMBER

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

SYSTEM

CHARACTER

HEIGHT

Figure 5–29. UPC–E and UPC–E0 Structure

Bar Codes

5–111

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Quiet Zone

Quiet zones extend on both ends of the bar code to permit the scan to begin

and end in a blank area. The IGP/PGL automatically produces an

11–module wide left quiet zone. You must provide sufficient space

(minimum of seven modules) on the form for the right quiet zone. The

number system character is also printed automatically in the left quiet zone.

Start/Stop Codes

The start/stop codes are special character codes marking those portions of

the bar code. These codes are automatically provided.

Number System Character

The number system character field for all UPC–E and UPC–E0 bar codes

must be zero.

Data Field

The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to

represent a limited character set (numbers 0–9 and Special Characters Start

and Stop). The bars and spaces vary in width from one to four modules.

Each character consists of two bars and two spaces that total seven

modules.

For UPC–E, eleven digits are expected, which are compressed down to the

six encoded symbol characters. For UPC–E0, six compressed digits are

expected.

The optional 2– or 5–digit add–on data field is placed at the end of the bar

code and typically identifies a periodical issue number or price,

respectively.

Readable Data

The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar

code data. It can either be suppressed or printed above or below the bar

code symbol.

Check Digit

The modulo–10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the

bar code symbol. The check digit verifies accurate scanning. The number

system character is included in the check digit algorithm.

5–112

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UPC–E and UPC–E0 Command Format

BARCODE

UPC-E or UPC-EO [+n]; [VSCAN;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;] [DARK;]

SR; SC

[(D)data field(D)]

[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]

STOP

BARCODE

The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.

type

Designates bar code type UPC–E or UPC–E0; enter

UPC–E or UPC–E0.

Optional parameter to provide a 2– or 5–digit add–on

code at the end of the bar code. Enter plus (+) and a

value of 2 or 5. The first bar of the add–on code is

separated by nine modules from the last bar of the UPC

symbol and a left guard pattern.

VSCAN

Optional parameter to orient the bar code structure

vertically. To select a vertical bar code, enter VSCAN.

If VSCAN is not entered, the bar code is horizontal.

MAG

Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally expand)

the bar code symbol. The magnification default value

is X1. Enter a magnification value to increase the

magnification. Increasing the magnification adjusts

printed character density.

You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 5–4.

(You must specify 8 digits for MAG for variable ratio.)

Hn[.m]

Optional parameter to adjust the overall height

(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol (including

the upper and lower 0.1–inch guard bands and any

human readable data). Height adjustments are made in

0.1–inch increments; enter H and a value from 4 to 99

to select height adjustments from 0.4 to 9.9 inches. The

default value is 1.3 inches.

.m is an additional number of dots for the bar code

height. (Dots are in the current dot scale.)

Bar Codes

5–113

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BFn

Optional parameter for assigning a dynamic bar code

data field location on a form. With this parameter, the

actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically

provided during the Execute Form Mode; the data is

not specified during the Create Form Mode. To use this

field:

a. Enter BF.

b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 255

to identify the bar code field. The SR and SC

parameters specify the exact location of the bar

code field identified by n.

c. The length of the data field need not be

specified, since it is fixed at 6 or 11 digits, plus

any add–on data.

d. The information for the data field is entered

dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.

(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code

Data” on page 4–55 in the “Commands”

chapter.) Do not use the data field parameter to

enter data when the BFn parameters are used.

However, refer to the data field description for

available characters.

DARK

Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar

codes. Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on page

4–10 for more information.

Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a value

ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the

form. Character row or dot row is specified based on

the Scale command (page 4–88), or use the CP.DP

format (page 4–7).

Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width

of the form. Character column or dot column is

specified based on the Scale command (page 4–88), or

use the CP.DP format (page 4–7).

5–114

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The printable character (delimiter) identifying the start

and finish of the data field. Enter any printable

character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a

character used within the data. The same character

must be used at both ends of the data field but it will

not print with the data.

data field

The characters available for the data field are 0 through

9 (30 through 39 hex, respectively).

For UPC–E, eleven digits are expected: Enter the

number system character first by entering 0; followed

by the five–digit Manufacturer Number; ending with

the five–digit Item Number. The Manufacturing

Number and Item Number sequences must conform to

one of the number pattern sequences shown in

Table 5–17.

The IGP/PGL will compress the 11 characters of data

down to the six encoded UPC–E symbol characters.

Include the 2– or 5–digit add–on data within the

delimiter at the end of this data field.

For UPC–E0, six digits are expected. These six digits

must be a valid compressed UPC–E number.

Otherwise, Error 96 (bar code data field has illegal

number) will be generated.

PDF

Optional parameter which affects printing of the

human readable data field. The data field will print

automatically unless the PDF–suppress command is

specified in the FONT parameter. UCR-B characters

can be printed above or below the bar code symbol.

This parameter is not allowed if a null data field is

specified. If the PDF is not entered in the UPC–E

command format, the data field automatically prints in

OCR–B.

Bar Codes

5–115

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LOC

Optional parameter to identify the location of the

printable data field. The default value is B, locating the

human readable data below the bar code. A locates the

printable data field above bar code. To compensate for

printing the 0.1–inch high data, the height of the bar

code body is reduced 0.1–inch.

FONT

Optional parameter to select the font for the human

readable data field. The default font type for UPC–E

bar codes is OCR–B; if no PDF command is entered in

the command format, the data field will print

automatically in OCR–B. Entering X will also

designate the OCR–B type font. Enter N to select the

normal ASCII 10 cpi font; enter O to select the

OCR–A 10 cpi font. Enter S to suppress printing the

data field and the trailing lower portions of the UPC

bar code.

STOP

Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP/PGL

continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If

STOP is not entered, an error message results.

5–116

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 5–16. Eleven Digit Compression

1. Manufacturer’s Number

Product Numbers that can be used 00000–00999

( ___ ___ )

first two digits of

manufacturer’s

number

( ___ ___ ___ ) ( ___ )

last three digits

of the product

number

third digit of the

manufacturer’s

number, use 0

thru 2 only

2. Manufacturer’s Number

Product Numbers that can be used 00000–00999

( ___ ___ ___ )

first three digits of

manufacturer’s

number

( ___ ___ )

( 3

depends on how

many digits appear in

the manufacturer’s

number

)

last two digits

of the product

number, use

00–99 only

3. Manufacturer’s Number

Product Numbers that can be used 00000–00999

( ___ ___ ___ ___ ) ( ___ )

( 4

)

first four digits of

manufacturer’s

number

last digit of

product

number, use

0–9 only

depends on how

many digits appear in

the manufacturer’s

number

4. Manufacturer’s Number

Product Numbers that can be used 00000–00999

( ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ )

( ___ )

all five digits of

manufacturer’s number

last digit of product

number, use 5–9 only

Bar Codes

5–117

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 5–17. Six–Digit Zero Expansion

if the 6 digit number ends with:

(1)

then the MFPS Number is:

and the Product Number is:

the first 2 digits (of the zero

suppressed number) plus 000

00 plus the THIRD, FOURTH

and FIFTH digit (of the zero

suppressed number)

00456

Example: 124560

(2)

12000

the first two digits plus 100

same as above

Example: 275831

(3)

27100

00583

the first two digits plus 200

same as above

Example: 412022

(4)

41200

00202

the first three digits plus 00

000 plus the FOURTH and

FIFTH digit

Example: 876543

(5)

87600

00007

the first four digits plus 0

0000 plus the FIFTH digit

Example: 753774

(6) 5, 6, 7, 8, 9

75370

00007

the first five digits of the zero

suppressed number

21375

0000 plus the SIXTH digit

Examples: 213756

517019

00006

00009

51701

5–118

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UPC–E and UPC–E0 Example

Figure 5–30 illustrates a horizontal and vertical UPC–E bar code generated

by the following program:

^~CREATE;UPCE

BARCODE

(Enter Create Form Mode)

(Bar Code command)

UPC–E+2;H9;DARK;34;15 (Dark Code UPC–E, 2–digit add–on,

H 0.9, at SR 34, SC 15)

*0927400000522*

PDF

(Data Field plus the 2–digit add–on data field)

(Printable Data Field)

STOP

(Ends Bar Code command)

BARCODE

(New Bar Code command)

UPC–E0+2;VSCAN;H10;DARK;34;50

(Vertical Dark UPC–E0, 2–digit add–on,

H 1.0, at SR 34, SC 50)

*92745422*

(Data Field plus the 2–digit add–on data field)

(Printable Data Field)

PDF

STOP

(Ends Bar Code command)

END

(Terminates Create Form Mode)

(Executes the form, form count of 1)

~EXECUTE;UPCE;1

SC 50

SC 15

SR 34

UPC–E

UPC–E0

UPC–E.EX

Figure 5–30. Sample UPC–E Bar Codes

Bar Codes

5–119

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Incremental Bar Code Fields

With the incremental bar code fields feature, you can update bar code (and

alphanumeric) data fields in a numeric or alphabetical manner automatically

with just one set of data sent from the host computer. You can print up to

65,535 forms with incremental fields automatically updated.

NOTE: Throughout the discussion of incremental fields, the term

“increment” or “incremental” means the field is automatically

updated by a specified amount (or increment). You can actually

increment the field by a positive amount (added) or a negative

amount (subtracted) as specified within the command.

You can use bar code incremental fields with fixed (static) data input as part

of the Create Form Mode, or with dynamic data supplied in the Execute

Form Mode. New formats and parameters are required in the bar code

commands for static and dynamic incremental fields.

In addition, the Execute Form command requires a new format and

parameters when you use incremental fields with dynamic data. You can

increment or decrement incremental fields, repeat at specified intervals

before updating, and reset to the starting value after a specified number of

increments.

5–120

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Incrementing Bar Code Data

The IGP/PGL internally counts incremental static (fixed) bar code data

fields. A maximum of 255 incremental fixed bar code data fields are allowed

per form.

Incrementing is controlled with the STEPMASK and STARTDATA

command parameters as described in Table 5–18. The parameters are part of

the bar code command or part of the Execute command when using the

Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data command.

The STEPMASK parameter performs three functions:

1. It defines the increment amount (step);

2. It defines the number of characters allowed in the data field

(STARTDATA); and

3. It provides a “mask” to link or unlink subfields of data for individual

incremental activity. The data provided in the STEPMASK field

combined with the data in the STARTDATA field determine the result of

these functions.

Table 5–18. Incremental Bar Code Data

STEPMASK

STARTDATA

Character Type and Function

Alpha characters are incremented by amount in

STEPMASK field.

0 – 9

A – Z

Numeric characters are incremented by amount in

STEPMASK field.

0 – 9

Same character type as character in the next right ad

jacent, linked increment position. Character type is

numeric if in the least significant position.

Space

0 – 9

Not A – Z

or 0 – 9

Error

Non–incrementing alphanumeric character

Linked, non–incrementing alphanumeric character

Not 0 – 9

or L

Any

Bar Codes

5–121

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The increment amount is defined by the numeric value of the STEPMASK

data. For example, a STEPMASK value of 1 increments the STARTDATA

by 1; a STEPMASK value of 2 increments the STARTDATA by 2.

The maximum number of characters allowed in the STARTDATA is defined

by the number of characters in the STEPMASK field and depends on the

specific type of bar code; the STARTDATA field cannot contain more

characters than used in the STEPMASK field and can only contain the

number and type of characters allowed by the bar code.

Linked and unlinked masking of subfields within the STARTDATA is

defined by using the L value in the STEPMASK field. L indicates linked but

nonincrementing data in the corresponding position of the STARTDATA

field. Any alphanumeric character other than L in the STEPMASK field

indicates a nonincrementing, non–linked STARTDATA subfield.

The following examples illustrate incrementing of bar code data fields. All

cases in the examples use a repeat count parameter value of 1 and a reset

count parameter value of 0. Incremental bar code data is generated

identically to incremental alphanumeric data except the IGP/PGL does not

add leading spaces to bar code data.

NOTE: In the following bar code examples, the value of the data is

shown automatically incrementing. In practical applications, the

bar code itself would print corresponding to the incremented

data as shown in the Auto Increment Fields Example on page

6–14 in the “Commands” chapter.

5–122

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Description

Value

STARTDATA:

STEPMASK:

ABC123

000001

Linked subfields: ABC and 123

RPT = 1

RST = 0

Results:

ABC123

ABC124

......

ABC999

ABD000

......

ZZZ999

AAA000

Description

Value

STARTDATA:

STEPMASK:

1ABC123

0LLL001

wo separate, but linked numeric

subfields: 1 and 123, while

fixed data ABC is nonincrementing

RPT = 1

Results:

1ABC123

RST = 0

1ABC124

. ...

1ABC999

2ABC000

Description

Value

STARTDATA:

STEPMASK:

ABC123

001XX1

wo separate, unlinked

subfields: ABC and 3,

while fixed data 1 and 2 is

nonincrementing

RPT = 1

Results:

ABC123

ABD124

RST = 0

ABE125

. .

ABI129

ABJ120

Bar Codes

5–123

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Incremental Bar Code Fixed Data Fields

The Incremental Bar Code Fixed Data Fields command is a variation of the

standard IGP/PGL bar code commands. Use this command with the

appropriate parameters from the standard bar code command when automatic

incrementing of fixed bar code data fields is required.

The Incremental Bar Code Fixed Data Fields command format is shown and

defined below. (Incremental command parameters are shown in boldface

type; standard bar code command parameters and optional nonincremental

parameters are shown in italics.)

BARCODE

type; [VSCAN;] [MAG;] [Hn;] I; [DARK;] SR; SC

[idir] STEPMASK; [RPTn;] [RSTn;] (D)STARTDATA(D)

[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]

STOP

Identifies this bar code command as an Incremental

Bar Code command; enter I.

idir

The optional increment direction parameter to specify

an increment (add) or decrement (subtract) to the data.

Enter a plus sign (+) or leave the field blank to

increment (the default). Enter a minus sign (–) to

decrement.

STEPMASK

Defines the increment amount (step), number of

character positions in the data field, and provides a

mask to control the increment function on specific

parts of the data. Refer to “Incrementing Bar Code

Data” on page 5–121 for complete information on

STEPMASK parameter values.

RPTn

The optional incremental repeat count parameter to

specify the number of times a particular field value

will repeat before it is incremented. A repeated field

value is useful when printing multiple rows/columns of

identical labels before increasing to the next value.

5–124

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To use the repeat count parameter, enter RPT and

replace n with a numeric value ranging from 1 to

65,535 to specify the repeat count.

The default repeat count parameter is 1, which will

increment the field value each time it is printed.

RSTn

The optional incremental reset count parameter to

specify the number of times an incremented field is

printed (on one or more forms) before it is reset to the

starting value. A reset count is useful when printing a

hierarchy of fields where a low–level field generates a

sequence of numbers, is reset, and the next higher field

level is incremented (such as in a unit/box/carton

application).

To use the reset count parameter, enter RST and

replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 65,535 to

specify the reset count. The default reset count value

is 0.

STARTDATA

Defines the starting value of the incrementing field.

The maximum amount of STARTDATA characters

must be less than or equal to the number of characters

in the STEPMASK field. Characters allowed for

incrementing fields is based on the type of bar code;

refer to the individual bar code descriptions for

information on valid type and quantity of data

characters.

The STARTDATA must be enclosed within standard

printable character delimiters just as a standard bar

code data field is enclosed within delimiters.

Bar Codes

5–125

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

~CREATE;TEST;288

VDUP;3;6

BARCODE

C3/9;H7;I;6;5

–00001;*12345*

PDF

(Enters Create Form mode)

(Bar code command)

(Printable data field)

STOP

(Ends bar code command)

VDUP;OFF

END

~EXECUTE;TEST

(Terminates Create Form mode)

(Prints form)

~NORMAL

5–126

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data Fields

The Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data Field command specifies the

location and size of the incremental dynamic data field during the Create

Form Mode. STEPMASK and STARTDATA parameters are supplied in the

Execute command during the Execute Form Mode. As with standard

dynamic data fields, incremental dynamic data fields allow you to change the

starting data without changing the form definition program. Additionally,

you can also change the increment parameters with each new job without

changing the form definition program.

The Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data Fields command is a variation of

the standard IGP/PGL bar code commands. Use this command with the

appropriate parameters from the standard bar code command when automatic

incrementing of dynamic bar code data fields is required. The Incremental

Bar Code Dynamic Data Fields command format is shown and defined

below. (Incremental command parameters are shown in boldface type;

standard bar code command parameters and optional nonincremental

parameters are shown in italics.)

BARCODE

type; [VSCAN;] [MAG;] [Hn;] IBFn;L [DARK;] SR; SC

[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]

STOP

IBFn;L

Identifies this bar code command as an Incremental

Bar Code Dynamic Data Field command. The

command parameter string identifies the incremental

dynamic data field location on the form and defines the

length of the bar code data. If these parameters are

used, do not enter the STEPMASK and STARTDATA

parameters in the Create Form Mode; enter them

dynamically during the Execute Form Mode. To use

the incremental dynamic data field:

a. Enter IBF to specify an incremental bar code

dynamic data field.

b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 255

to identify the bar code string location on the

form. The standard bar code SR and SC

command parameters specify the exact location

of the field identified by n.

Bar Codes

5–127

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

c. Replace L with a number equal to the number of

characters in the dynamic bar code string

(STARTDATA) ranging from 1 to 1024. The

number of characters and type of characters

depends on the type of bar code used. Refer to

the individual bar code descriptions for

information on type and quantity of data allowed

for the specific bar code type.

d. Dynamically enter the STEPMASK and

STARTDATA parameters in the Execute Form

Mode. The length of the data must be less than

or equal to the value assigned to the length (L)

parameter. Refer to “Execute Form: Incremental

Dynamic Data” on page 4–56 in the

“Commands” chapter for more information.

Duplicating Incremental Bar Code Fields

Fixed and dynamic incremental bar code data fields are duplicated

horizontally and vertically in the same way that incremental alphanumeric

fixed and dynamic data fields are duplicated. Refer to page 4–26 in the

“Commands” chapter for more information on duplicating incremental data.

5–128

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

~CREATE;TEST;288

VDUP;3;6

BARCODE

(Enters Create Form mode)

(Bar code command)

C3/9;H7;IBF1;6;6;5

PDF

STOP

(Ends bar code command)

VDUP;OFF

END

(Terminates Create Form mode)

(Prints form)

~EXECUTE;TEST

~IBF1;+000001;*123459*

~NORMAL

Bar Codes

5–129

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5–130

Bar Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Form Examples and Exercises

Chapter Contents

Form Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2

Example: Using the Setup Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5

Example: Dynamic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5

Example: Auto Increment Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–14

Form Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–19

Logo Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–32

Form Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–37

Directory Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–47

Delete Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–48

Solving Program Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–49

Form Examples and Exercises

6–1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Form Examples

NOTE: The examples in this manual were produced on an L1016 printer.

Using a different type of printer or a different configuration could

affect the appearance of your printed samples compared to those

shown in this manual.

Additionally, depending on the paper, top–of–form setting and

initial print position, the positioning of your printed samples on the

page may vary compared to the examples shown here; these

samples have been positioned on the page to correspond with the

related text.

The following examples are written to print on 11–in paper, and

some of them have to be modified accordingly to print on a typical

4–in–long thermal printer label.

The example on the following page demonstrates how to use Create

commands in the Create Form mode using the CP.DP format. The printed

output for this program is shown in Figure 6–1 on page 6–4. (The Hand

logo used in this example was previously defined and stored and, thus, is not

shown in the form program.) The box surrounding the form represents the

paper size.

NOTE: If comment lines are used on command lines, they must be preceded

by a slash (/). Do not use / comments on–lines containing an SFCC

(NORMAL, CREATE, EXECUTE, etc.). Comments in parentheses

in this section are provided for better understanding of IGP/PGL

operation but should not be included in your IGP/PGL files.

6–2

Form Examples and Exercises

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

basicfrm.ex

(program)

Form Examples and Exercises

6–3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Figure 6–1. Basic Create Form Example

6–4

Form Examples and Exercises

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example: Using the Setup Command

The following example demonstrates how the margins,landscape orientation,

8LPI and font double wide are automatically SETUP at power–up.

~SETUP

CONFIG

TOP/BOTTOM MARGIN ; 1

LEFT MARGIN ; 10

END

~PAPER ; ROTATE 270

~LPI ; 8

~EXPAND ; 1 ; 2

~SETUPEND

Example: Dynamic Data

The process of executing dynamic alphanumeric and bar code data fields is

explained in the following exercises. Each stage includes printing the

program; however, the total program may be entered as one unit. Each stage

offers the option of choosing features applicable to specific needs.

Basic Design

The SAMPLE program below, shown in Figure 6–2, is a basic design in

CP.DP format and defined by standard Create Form mode command

sequences. The label is duplicated twice horizontally on an approximate form

length of 8 1/2 x 5 1/2 inches (390 dots), with three bar code locations

specified per label. The result is two “forms” — two labels per form, four

labels printed on one 8-1/2 x 11-inch “page.” On the next few pages, you will

add bar code data, dynamic alphanumeric data, and dynamic bar code data.

Then you will execute and print the complete form (Figure 6–3).

When entering command lines, remember to correctly terminate each line

with a line feed or carriage return with line feed. Use your system commands

to open a file for the label program. When you have finished, exit the file (if

necessary for your system) and print.

Form Examples and Exercises

6–5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

~CREATE;SAMPLE;390 (Create Form; form length is 390 dots)

HDUP;2;37

BOX

(2 horizontal dupes, 37 columns apart)

(Box command)

2;3.5;9;30;35

STOP

(Stop the Box command)

HORZ

(Horizontal Line command)

1;14.5;9;35

1;19.5;9;35

1;24.5;9;35

STOP

(Stop the Horizontal Line command)

(Begin Corner command)

CORNER

2;4;11;9;33;1.2;2

2;9.6;11;13.6;33;1.2;2

STOP

(Stop the Corner command)

ALPHA

(Begin Alphanumeric command)

(This is “fixed” text on the form)

4.8;12;0;0;*FROM:*

6.3;12;2;2;*PRINTRONIX*

C15;7.3;16;0;0;*17500 CARTWRIGHT RD.*

C15;8.1;16;0;0;*IRVINE , CA 92714*

10;12;0;0;*TO*

14.8;11;0;0;*S.O.*

19.8;11;0;0;*S/N:*

24.8;11;0;0;*P/N:*

STOP

(Stop the Alphanumeric command)

HDUP;OFF

END

(Stop the horizontal duplication)

(End the Create Form mode)

~EXECUTE;SAMPLE;1

~NORMAL

(Execute form)

6–6

Form Examples and Exercises

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

dyn1.ex

Figure 6–2. Sample Form

Form Examples and Exercises

6–7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Bar Code Fields

Identify the location of the data fields for each of the six bar codes (one

location at each S.O., S/N, and P/N field on the form). The type of bar code

and the human readable data information is also specified within the bar code

commands. (Refer to the “Bar Codes” chapter for detailed bar code

information.)

Each bar code must be designated separately. The bar code commands are

part of the Create Form mode; therefore, they must be entered in the Create

Form mode before the END command. However, because each dynamic field

is assigned a unique number, the commands should not be duplicated.

Reopen the file and input the following commands before the END

command line but after the HDUP;OFF command.

NOTE: The IGP/PGL will horizontally or vertically duplicate dynamic bar

code or alphanumeric data fields if required. This will also duplicate

the n parameter identifying the dynamic data fields. If unique data

fields are required, do not duplicate the commands.

6–8

Form Examples and Exercises

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BARCODE

(First bar code command)

(Upper left S.O. field, assigned number 1)

C3/9;H7;BF1;8;DARK;15.1;10.4

PDF;O

(Print the data field in OCR–A font)

STOP

BARCODE

(Stop the first bar code command)

(New bar code command)

(Upper left S/N field, assigned number 2)

C3/9;H7;BF2;8;DARK;20;10.4

PDF;O

STOP

BARCODE

(Upper left P/N field, assigned number 3)

C3/9;H7;BF3;8;DARK;25.5;10.4

PDF;O

STOP

BARCODE

(Upper right S.O. field, assigned number 4)

C3/9;H7;BF4;8;DARK;15.1;47.4

PDF;O

STOP

BARCODE

(Upper right S/N field, assigned number 5)

C3/9;H7;BF5;8;DARK;20;47.4

PDF;O

STOP

BARCODE

(Upper right P/N field, assigned number 6)

C3/9;H7;BF6;8;DARK;25.5;47.4

PDF;O

STOP

(Stop the bar code command)

Form Examples and Exercises

6–9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Dynamic Alphanumeric Fields

Identify the location of the dynamic alphanumeric fields using the

alphanumerics command. Input the following alphanumeric command lines

after the HDUP;OFF command and before the Create Form mode END line.

A separate alphanumerics command sequence is used in order to assign

unique numbers to each dynamic data field. (If unique identifying numbers

were not required, these alphanumeric commands would be added to the

existing alphanumeric commands being duplicated to produce the fixed form

alphanumeric data.)

NOTE: Before the following dynamic data commands can be entered, delete

the form count parameter from the existing Execute command line

(the ;1 at the end of the Execute command line shown on the

program on page 6–6 ). The Form Count parameter cannot be used

when data is supplied dynamically. The Execute command line

should now read ~EXECUTE;SAMPLE and must be correctly

terminated. This is the Execute command for the first page of

dynamic data.

ALPHA

(Begin alpha command for dynamic data)

(AF1 is the first line of upper left TO area)

(AF2 is the second line of upper left TO area)

(AF3 is the third line of upper left TO area)

(AF4 is the first line of lower left TO area)

(AF5 is the second line of lower left TO area)

(AF6 is the third line of lower left TO area)

(Stop the alphanumerics command)

AF1;20;10.8;12;0;0

AF2;20;11.8;12;0;0

AF3;20;12.8;12;0;0

AF4;20;10.8;49;0;0

AF5;20;11.8;49;0;0

AF6;20;12.8;49;0;0

STOP

6–10

Form Examples and Exercises

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Dynamic Alphanumeric and Bar Code Data

Enter the following dynamic data following the Execute command. These

dynamic data commands will supply the variable data to the bar code and

alphanumeric fields previously identified in the Create Form mode. After

entering the data, exit the file (if necessary with your system) and print. The

completed form is shown in Figure 6–3.

~EXECUTE;SAMPLE

~AF1;*B AND C CO.*

~AF2;*P.O. BOX 212*

~AF3;*LOS ANGELES, CA 90051*

~AF4;*M. H. INC*

(Upper left label addressee)

(Upper right label addressee)

~AF5;*101 BEACH RD*

~AF6;*MALIBU, CA 97772*

~BF1;*S05995*

(Upper left label S.O.)

~BF2;*011233*

(Upper left label S/N)

~BF3;*190204*

(Upper left label P/N)

~BF4;*S05996*

(Upper right label S.O.)

(Upper right label S/N)

(Upper right label P/N)

(Completes 1st form–upper labels)

(Lower left label addressee)

~BF5;*000535*

~BF6;*104523*

~FF

~AF1;*ABC CORPORATION*

~AF2;*1234 ANYWHERE ST*

~AF3;*YOUR TOWN, MA 03498*

~AF4;*XYZ COMPUTERS*

~AF5;*845 N. ALLEN ST*

~AF6;*WEST BEND, OR 97601*

~BF1;*S05997*

(Lower right label addressee)

(Lower left label S.O.)

(Lower left label S/N)

~BF2;*456789*

~BF3;*102245*

(Lower left label P/N)

~BF4;*S05999*

(Lower right label S.O.)

(Lower right label S/N)

(Lower right label P/N)

(Completes 2nd form–lower labels)

~BF5;*567890*

~BF6;*103764*

~NORMAL

Form Examples and Exercises

6–11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Multiple page documents must be separated by a form feed. (The “page” of

data includes the Execute command, the dynamic data commands, and the

Normal command.) Using the SFON command (described on page 4–90), a

~FF (form feed) command will allow as many forms as required to print with

the appropriate new data supplied dynamically. When the SFOFF command

is used, send a hex 0C instead of ~FF to print multiple pages with new

dynamic data.

6–12

Form Examples and Exercises

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

dyn2.ex

Figure 6–3. Dynamic Data Example

Form Examples and Exercises

6–13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example: Auto Increment Fields

The following program, designed in accordance with current specifications

for AIAG–B–3 shipping label standards, creates four automatically

incrementing/decrementing AIAG labels with alphanumeric and bar code

data. The printed output of this program is shown on pages 6–17 and 6–18.

6–14

Form Examples and Exercises

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Form Examples and Exercises

6–15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

autoincr.ex

(program)

autoincr.ex

6–16

Form Examples and Exercises

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Figure 6–4. Auto Increment Fields Example

Form Examples and Exercises

6–17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Figure 6–5. Auto Increment Fields Example

6–18

Form Examples and Exercises

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Form Exercise

In the following example, you will create and execute a form. Using

character scaling (discussed in detail on page 4–88) on a 60 x 72 dot per inch

(dpi) grid, your form will include the following:

•

a box

a set of corners

vertical lines

alphanumeric data

horizontal lines

a bar code

This exercise will help you become familiar with the IGP/PGL by taking you

through 14 steps to build a complete form. Detailed command descriptions

for producing forms, bar codes, and logos are described in the “Commands”

chapter.

All the data and commands for the form are entered into a file in the host

computer. The filename used in this exercise is PRACTC.FRM, and the form

name used is PRACTICE. If another form named PRACTICE already exists,

it will be deleted by this exercise.

Begin each step by reading the explanation. The information you input is

listed under the word Enter. The parameters of each command have a

specific order for data entry; input the data exactly as shown, but always use

the actual SFCC required by your system where the ~ is shown. The general

command format is listed under the word Format next to each example. The

SFCC is represented by (cc) in the general format.

Use the standard commands on your system to open, close, or print the file

with the form data where your system format is required.

NOTE: Do not forget to terminate each command line with a line feed (or

carriage return with line feed), or a paper motion command. Enter

all commands in uppercase. Make sure the printer power is on and

the printer is READY, ON–LINE.

Form Examples and Exercises

6–19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Creating a Box and Corners

1. On your host computer, open/create a file for your practice form. For

example:

Enter

Format

PRACTC.FRM

(system format)

2. Enter the Create Form mode, and specify a form name. This is the first

input for every new form. Use the Create command and PRACTICE as

the form name.

Enter

Format

~CREATE;PRACTICE

(cc)CREATE[/];formname[;FL][;DISK]

3. The IGP/PGL is now ready for Create Form mode commands. Design a

box with a line thickness (LT) of 2 dots, a top left corner at starting row

(SR) 35, starting column (SC) 16, and a bottom right corner at ending

row (ER) 53, ending column (EC) 61. The STOP command must be

entered to inform the IGP/PGL that the Box command is complete.

Enter

Format

BOX

2;35;16;53;61

STOP

LT;SR;SC;ER;EC

STOP

4. Use the Corner command to set the box off with corners having a line

thickness (LT) of 3 dots, a top left corner at row (SR) 30, column (SC)

13, a bottom right corner at row (ER) 57, column (EC) 64, a vertical

length (VL) 5 character spaces long, and a horizontal length (HL) 7

character spaces long. The STOP command must be entered to stop the

Corner command and END must be entered to terminate the Create

Form mode to prepare for printing.

Enter

Format

CORNER

3;30;13;57;64;5;7

STOP

CORNER

LT;SR;SC;ER;EC;VL;HL

STOP

END

6–20

Form Examples and Exercises

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5. Now use the Execute command and form name to prepare for printing.

Enter a blank line using a terminator and then the Normal command to

instruct the IGP/PGL to return to the Normal mode after executing the

form.

Enter

Format

~EXECUTE;PRACTICE

(cc)EXECUTE;formname[;PAGE

n][;FC][;DISK]

~NORMAL

(cc)NORMAL

6. To print the form, exit the file (if necessary for your system) and use the

system print command to print the file. For example, after exiting the

file and your system prompt returns:

Enter

Format

PRINT PRACTC.FRM (System Format)

The form should look like the one shown in Figure 6–6. When it was printed,

the form program was stored in the IGP/PGL memory. If errors are detected

in the program, error messages are printed and only the error–free portions of

the program are stored in the IGP/PGL memory. (Refer to “Solving Program

Errors” on page 6–49.)

Form Examples and Exercises

6–21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SC 13

SR 30

SC 16

SR 35

ER 53

EC 61

ER 57

boxcorn.ex

EC 64

Figure 6–6. Box and Corner Example

6–22

Form Examples and Exercises

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adding Horizontal and Vertical Lines

7. Now return to the file. When the file reopens, the existing program (the

contents of the file) is displayed. Use your system commands to reopen

the file. For example:

Enter

Format

PRACTC.FRM

(System Format)

8. All Create Form mode commands must be entered into the program

before the End command line. Add three horizontal lines, each with a

thickness (LT) of 1 at rows (R) 40, 45, and 49 and each ranging from

column (SC) 16 to column (EC) 61.

Enter

Format

HORZ

1;40;16;61

1;45;16;61

1;49;16;61

STOP

LT;R;SC;EC

STOP

9. Add two vertical lines, each with a thickness (LT) of 1, both in column

ranging from row (SR) 49 to row (ER) 53.

Enter

Format

VERT

1;49;40;45

1;49;49;53

STOP

LT;C;SR;ER

STOP

The last two commands have added to the form definition. PRACTICE now

looks like Figure 6–7.

Form Examples and Exercises

6–23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COLUMN 49

ROW 40

ROW 45

ROW 49

boxline.ex

Figure 6–7. Box/Corner Example with Horizontal and Vertical Lines

6–24

Form Examples and Exercises

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adding Fixed Alphanumeric Text

10. Use the Create Form mode Alpha command to add some fixed

alphanumeric text to the form. Specify some compressed print (Cn), the

starting row (SR) and starting column (SC) for each alphanumeric

string, any vertically (VE) or horizontally (HE) expanded strings, and

the alphanumeric string itself which must be within the printable

character (quotation marks or asterisks, for example). Substitute your

own name, address, etc. in the appropriate areas. If you do not want to

include some of the data on your form, do not enter the line.

Enter

ALPHA

31;22;0;0;*PRINTRONIX, INC*

32;22;0;0;*17500 CARTWRIGHT ROAD*

33;22;0;0;*IRVINE, CA 92714*

35.9;17;0;0;*SERIAL NUMBER*

40.3;17;0;0;*PART NUMBER*

40.3;50;0;0;*MFG. DATE*

45.3;17;0;0;*DESCRIPTION*

49.3;17;0;0;*INTERFACE*

49.3;50;0;0;*VERSION*

C13;31;16;0;0;*FROM:*

C15;54;26;0;0;*Call PRINTRONIX for more information.*

C15;55;34;0;0;*(714)863–1900*

STOP

Format

ALPHA

[R;][E;][Cn;][AFn;L;][DIR;][UC;][DARK;]SR;SC;VE;HE;(D)Text(D)

STOP

NOTE: The sample data entered above uses CP.DP format (such as 35.9,

40.3, etc.) in the starting row (SR) parameters. This precisely

positions the data to avoid overlapping the alphanumeric data with

the box and horizontal line data previously entered. For complete

information on the CP.DP format, refer to the “Commands” chapter.

Form Examples and Exercises

6–25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

At this point, the PRACTC.FRM file should contain the following form

program data:

~CREATE;PRACTICE

BOX

2;35;16;53;61

STOP

CORNER

3;30;13;57;64;5;7

STOP

HORZ

1;40;16;61

1;45;16;61

1;49;16;61

STOP

VERT

1;49;40;45

1;49;49;53

STOP

ALPHA

31;22;0;0;*PRINTRONIX, INC.*

32;22;0;0;*17500 CARTWRIGHT ROAD*

33;22;0;0;*IRVINE, CA 92714*

35.9;17;0;0;*SERIAL NUMBER*

40.3;17;0;0;*PART NUMBER*

40.3;50;0;0;*MFG. DATE*

45.3;17;0;0;*DESCRIPTION*

49.3;17;0;0;*INTERFACE*

49.3;50;0;0;*VERSION*

C13;31;16;0;0;*FROM:*

C15;54;26;0;0;*Call PRINTRONIX for more information.*

C15;55;34;0;0;*(714)863–1900*

AF1;7;38.7;19.3;4;3

AF2;11;43;20;2;2

AF3;31;47.3;20;2;1

AF4;33;51.3;20;2;1

STOP

END

~EXECUTE; PRACTICE

~NORMAL

PRINT PRACTC.FRM (Host system command to send file to printer.)

6–26

Form Examples and Exercises

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Notice that the END, EXECUTE;PRACTICE and NORMAL statements are

still in the file. These are always necessary to end the storage of the form in

the IGP/PGL and cause it to print. Remember, a blank line must always

separate the EXECUTE and NORMAL commands. Print the file

PRACTC.FRM. The PRACTICE form should look like Figure 6–8, except

for any alphanumeric data substitutions you made. Again, if error messages

occur, refer to “Solving Program Errors” on page 6–49 .

COLUMN 16

COLUMN 22

ROW 31

ROW 32

ROW 33

ROW 35.9

ROW 40.3

COLUMN 50

COLUMN 17

ROW 45.3

ROW 49.3

ROW 54

ROW 55

COLUMN 26

COLUMN 34

practc1.ex

Figure 6–8. Practice Form Example

Form Examples and Exercises

6–27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adding a Bar Code

11. Change the form definition by adding bar code type Code 39 (C39), one

of the codes available on the IGP/PGL. First, reopen the file. Bar codes

are defined in the Create Form mode; therefore, the Bar Code command

must be entered before the End command line. In the Bar Code

command, specify type C39 and 0.8 inch height (Hn). Use a dynamic

bar code data field (BF) identified by the number (n) 1 with a length (L)

of 5. The actual data will be provided dynamically in the Execute Form

mode. Specify the starting row (SR) 35.7 and starting column (SC) 39,

and stop the command.

Enter

BARCODE

C3/9;H8;BF1;5;DARK;35.7;39

STOP

Format

BARCODE

C3/9[CD];[VSCAN;][MAG;][Hn;][BFn;L;][DARK;]SR;SC

[(D)data field(D)]

[PDF[;LOC][;FONT]]

STOP

12. To dynamically input alphanumeric data fields, first identify the

locations for the data in the Create Form mode as part of the form

definition. Enter the locations in the existing Alpha command sequence

(or use a new Alpha command). In the Alpha command sequence, enter

the alphanumeric field (AF), the field number (n), length (L), starting

row (SR) and column (SC), and any vertical (VE) or horizontal (HE)

expansion. To enter this alphanumeric data in the existing Alpha

command sequence, the data must be entered before the existing Alpha

command STOP line.

Enter

AF1;7;38.7;19.3;3;3

AF2;11;43;20;2;2

AF3;31;47.3;20;2;1

AF4;33;51.3;20;2;1

Format

6–28

Form Examples and Exercises

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ALPHA (previously input)

[R;][E;][Cn;][AFn;L;][DIR;][UC;]SR;SC;VE;HE;(D)Text(D)

STOP (previously input)

13. Supply the dynamic data during the Execute Form mode (following the

EXECUTE;PRACTICE line). Use the SFCC, specify the dynamic

alphanumeric field (AF), bar code field (BF), the field number

(corresponding to those just entered in the form definition), and the data

itself. (This method can be repeated to supply new data to each form

printed by separating the pages of data with a form feed. Refer to

“Execute Form: Dynamic Alphanumeric Data” on page 4–54 in the

“Commands” chapter.)

Enter

Format

~AF1;*49114*

~AF2;*106772–902*

(cc)AFn;(D)data(D)

~AF3;*INTELLIGENT GRAPHICS PROCESSOR*

~AF4;*PARALLEL – CENTRONICS*

~BF1;*49114*

(cc)BFn;(D)data(D)

14. Now the PRACTC.FRM file contains all the following information (the

complete form program). Print the form by printing the file. The

completed form is shown in Figure 6–9.

~CREATE;PRACTICE

BOX

2;35;16;53;61

STOP

CORNER

3;30;13;57;64;5;7

STOP

HORZ

1;40;16;61

1;45;16;61

1;49;16;61

STOP

VERT

1;49;40;45

1;49;49;53

STOP

Form Examples and Exercises

6–29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ALPHA

31;22;0;0;*PRINTRONIX, INC.*

32;22;0;0;*17500 CARTWRIGHT ROAD*

33;22;0;0;*IRVINE, CA 92714*

35.9;17;0;0;*SERIAL NUMBER*

40.3;17;0;0;*PART NUMBER*

40.3;50;0;0;*MFG. DATE*

45.3;17;0;0;*DESCRIPTION*

49.3;17;0;0;*INTERFACE*

49.3;50;0;0;*VERSION*

C13;31;16;0;0;*FROM:*

C15;54;26;0;0;*Call PRINTRONIX for more information.*

C15;55;34;0;0;*(714)863–1900*

AF1;7;38.7;19.3;4;3

AF2;11;43;20;2;2

AF3;31;47.3;20;2;1

AF4;33;51.3;20;2;1

STOP

BARCODE

C3/9;H8;BF1;5;DARK;35.7;39

STOP

END

~EXECUTE;PRACTICE

~AF1;*49114*

~AF2;*106772–902*

~AF3;*INTELLIGENT GRAPHICS PROCESSOR*

~AF4;*PARALLEL – CENTRONICS*

~BF1;*49114*

~NORMAL

PRINT PRACTC.FRM (Host system command to send file to printer.)

6–30

Form Examples and Exercises

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COLUMN 19.3

COLUMN 39

ROW 35.7

ROW 38.7

ROW 43

ROW 47.3

ROW 51.3

practc2.ex

Figure 6–9. Completed Practice Form Example

Form Examples and Exercises

6–31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Logo Exercise

In this exercise, you will generate a logo. The following sample uses a hand

logo. Using dot scaling (discussed in detail on page 4–88) on an 8–1/2 x

11–inch form, a hand was drawn on a grid, with each dot tabulated by row

and column position. If a grid coordinate occupies half or more of a dot

position, include that position in your logo program. (Grid samples are

located in Appendix B.)

Each dot position used must be identified individually. However, you can use

a hyphen between the starting and ending columns to indicate a section of

consecutive dots. For example, this hand logo requires dots in row 1,

columns 40–42, shown in Figure 6–10. A sequential row order is not

required.

A logo is created and stored as an element in the definition of a form. For

example, to use a logo, first design it in the Create Logo mode; then add it to

a form in the Create Form mode; then execute the form (with the logo) in the

Execute Form mode. The following logo exercise includes all three of these

steps.

6–32

Form Examples and Exercises

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DOT POSITIONS

Column

Row

Column

40–42

Row

1–36

1–39

1–58

1–57

4–24

7–23

8–23

9–23

11–24

12–25

14–27

15–30

17–32

18–35

22–34

25–35

26–36

28–37

30–37

32–37

33–37

35–36

35–42

36–42

35–42

33–41

31–40

30–38

29–36

28–35

27–34;52–54

24–33;48–54

22–31;45–54

19–30;41–54

16–29;38–53

13–29;36–51

11–29;33–48

9–44

7–42

6–39

4–36

1–34

1–60

1–59

1–35

Figure 6–10. Sample Logo

Form Examples and Exercises

6–33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Creating a Logo

1. Use your system commands to open a file for the logo program with the

filename HNDLGO.FOM. For example:

Enter

Format

HNDLGO.FOM

(System Format)

2. Input the Special Function Control Character and Logo mode command

to put the IGP/PGL in the Create Logo mode. Include HAND as the

logo name; specify a vertical length (VL) of 56 (column length) and a

horizontal length (HL) of 60 (row length).

Enter

Format

~LOGO;HAND;56;60

(cc)LOGO;logoname;VL;HL[;DISK]

3. Enter each row of dot positions as tabulated from the grid and shown in

Figure 6–10. The format is Row;Column (for example,

15;13–29;36–51). Each row is entered on a separate line. After all the

dot positions are entered, terminate the Create Logo mode by entering

an End command line.

4. Use the Special Function Control Character and Create command to

create a form with the form name LEFTHAND. To add the logo to the

form, input a Create Form mode Logo Call command, identify the logo

starting row (SR) 45 and starting column (SC) 33, and specify the logo

to use by its name (HAND). Stop the Logo command and end the

Create Form mode.

Enter

Format

~CREATE;LEFTHAND

LOGO

(cc)CREATE;[/]formname[;FL][;DISK]

LOGO

45;33;HAND

STOP

SR;SC;logoname[;DISK]

STOP

END

6–34

Form Examples and Exercises

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5. Input the Special Function Control Character and Execute command for

the LEFTHAND form just created. Input a blank line, the Special

Function Control Character, and the Normal command to instruct the

IGP/PGL to return to the Normal mode after execution.

Enter

Format

~EXECUTE;LEFTHAND (cc)EXECUTE;formname[;PAGE n][;FC]

~NORMAL

(cc)NORMAL

6. Use system commands to exit the HNDLGO.FOM file and print. The

finished program and logo should look like the following sample. If

error messages occur, refer to “Solving Program Errors” on page 6–49 .

Form Examples and Exercises

6–35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

~LOGO;HAND;56;60

1;40–42

2;38–42

3;36–42

4;35–42

5;33–41

6;31–40

7;30–38

8;29–36

9;28–35

10;27–34;52–54

11;24–33;48–54

12;22–31;45–54

13;19–30;41–54

14;16–29;38–53

15;13–29;36–51

16;11–29;33–48

17;9–44

18;7–42

19;6–39

20;4–36

21;1–34

22;1–34

23;1–34

24;1–60

25;1–60

26;1–60

27;1–60

28;1–59

29;1–59

30;1–35

31;1–36

32;1–39

33;1–58

34;1–58

35;1–58

36;1–58

37;1–58

38;1–57

39;4–24

40;7–23

41;8–23

42;9–23

43;11–24

44;12–25

45;14–27

46;15–30

47;17–32

48;18–33

49;22–34

50;25–35

51;26–36

52;28–37

53;30–37

54;32–37

55;33–37

56;35–36

END

~CREATE;LEFTHAND

LOGO

ROW 45

45;33;HAND

STOP

END

~EXECUTE;LEFTHAND

~NORMAL

HANDLOGO.EX

COLUMN 33

6–36

Form Examples and Exercises

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Form Design

In this exercise, you will produce a complete form by sketching it out on a

grid in the same way the logo was designed. Again, this exercise uses

character scaling on an 8–1/2 x 11–inch (60 x 72 dpi) page. (Again, the

thermal printer does not use the 8–1/2– x 11–in format, so modifications are

necessary.) (Refer to page 4–88 in the “Commands” chapter, where character

scaling is discussed in detail.)

Page Layout Considerations

At 6 lines per inch (lpi) and 10 characters per inch (cpi) printing, a standard

8–1/2 x 11–inch sheet of paper has a print area of 66 lines (rows) and 85

characters (columns). (The printable area will vary if you are not printing at

6 lpi and 10 cpi.) Thus, the grid used to design an 8–1/2 x 11–inch form

should accommodate this 66 x 85 area. (Appendix C discusses the printable

area for different form sizes in more detail.)

Using the grids provided in Appendix B, sketch out the form layout and

identify the starting and ending values. These values will be used to input

IGP/PGL command parameters.

Form Examples and Exercises

6–37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Planning the Form Layout

In this example, assume you work for the HandCraft Boat Company. Your

slogan is “Quality boats crafted by hand,” and the owner, Mr. Handcraft, has

asked you to design a simple form that his salespeople can use for special

orders. On the form, he wants a logo, the slogan, the customer’s name,

spaces for other particulars of the order, and a bar code to distinguish the

sales region and boat division from other HandCraft enterprises. Begin this

12–step task as described below.

1. First, design the form on the Standard Grid provided in Appendix B.

Figure 6–11 shows the locations of the various form components.

Compensate for expanded characters and plan for the logo.

2. Define the logo and then return to the form to add all the form

components. Modify the hand logo already on file as the HandCraft

logo. Use the Logo Grid in Appendix B, and refer to Figure 6–12, which

shows the dot positions of the hand logo with a boat added to the hand.

When dot positions (or a range of dot positions) are not specified, the

boat image in the hand emerges.

3. Open a file named HNDCFT.FOM to contain all the form information.

As shown in the following example, use the Create Logo mode

command, name the logo HANDCRFT, specify the logo height (VL)

and width (HL), enter the dot positions used, and end the Logo

command.

6–38

Form Examples and Exercises

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Enter

Format

HNDCFT.FOM

~LOGO;HANDCRFT;56;60

1;40–42

(System Format)

(cc)LOGO;logoname;VL;HL[;DISK]

row#;dot;dot1–dot2;dot

2;38–42

3;36–42

4;35–42

5;33–41

6;31–40

7;30–38

8;29–36

9;28–35

10;27–34;52–54

11;24–33;48–54

12;22–31;45–54

13;19–30;41–54

14;16–29;38–53

15;13–17;19–29;36–51

16;11–17;20–29;33–48

17;9–17;21–44

18;7–17;22–42

19;6–17;22–39

20;4–17;23–36

21;1–17;24–34

22;1–17;25–34

23;1–17;26–34

24;1–17;27–60

25;1–17;28–60

26;1–17;29–60

27;1–17;30–60

28;1–17;31–59

29;1–17;19–59

30;1–17;19–35

31;1–4;33–36

32;1–5;33–39

33;1–6;33–58

34;1–7;33–58

35;1–58

36;1–58

37;1–58

38;1–57

39;4–24

40;7–23

41;8–23

42;9–23

43;11–24

44;12–25

45;14–27

46;15–30

47;17–32

48;18–33

49;22–34

50;25–35

51;26–36

52;28–37

53;30–37

54;32–37

55;33–37

56;35–36

END

Form Examples and Exercises

6–39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Figure 6–11. Sample Form Design

6–40

Form Examples and Exercises

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Figure 6–12. Logo Design

Form Examples and Exercises

6–41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Creating a Form and Adding Form Components

4. Now create the form and start adding the form components from the

layout grid. (Refer to Figure 6–11). Use the Special Function Control

Character and Create command to define a form named HCBOATS. Use

the Box command to define the outer border with a line thickness (LT)

3, top left corner at row (SR) 11 column (SC) 10, and bottom right

corner at row (ER) 55, column (EC) 70. In the same Box command

sequence, define another box with a line thickness of 2, top left corner at

row 28 column 14, and bottom right corner at row 44.9 column 66.

After defining the boxes, stop the Box command.

Enter

Format

~CREATE;HCBOATS

BOX

(cc)CREATE;[/]formname[;FL][;DISK]

BOX

3;11;10;55;70

2;28;14;44.9;66

STOP

LT;SR;SC;ER;EC

STOP

5. Mr. Handcraft would like corners around the slogan. Use the Corner

command to define a line thickness (LT) of 2, top left corner at row

(SR) 48 column (SC) 24, and bottom right corner at row (ER) 52

column (EC) 56. Make the vertical (VL) corner piece 4 spaces long and

the horizontal (HL) corner piece 5 spaces long. Then stop the Corner

command.

Enter

Format

CORNER

2;48;24;52;56;4;5

STOP

CORNER

LT;SR;SC;ER;EC;VL;HL

STOP

6. To make the columns for the special order items, add two vertical lines

each with a line thickness (LT) of 1, one line in column (C) 22 and the

other line in column 58. Each line will start at row (SR) 28 and end at

row (ER) 44.9.

Enter

Format

VERT

1;22;28;44.9

1;58;28;44.9

STOP

LT;C;SR;ER

STOP

6–42

Form Examples and Exercises

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7. To add the horizontal lines, define one line and then duplicate that line

using the Vertical Duplication command. The line will have a single line

thickness (LT), be in row (R) 30.4, starting in column (SC) 14 and

ending in column (EC) 66. With vertical duplication, the line will be

duplicated (DN) 6 times with 2.5 row offset (OF) spacing between each

duplication. The Vertical Duplication command must be input, the

horizontal line being duplicated must be input, and the Vertical

Duplication command must be turned off.

Enter

Format

VDUP;6;2.5

HORZ

VDUP;dup#;offset#

HORZ

1;30.4;14;66

STOP

LT;R;SC;EC

STOP

VDUP;OFF

8. All the text shown on the grid is fixed into position on the form with a

single Alpha command sequence. The starting row, starting column, and

text can be taken right from the grid and put into the program.

Enter

ALPHA

14;31;3;2;*HandCraft Boats*

18;14;0;0;*CUSTOMER:*

18;51;0;0;*PHONE:*

20;14;0;0;*HULL NO:*

20;49;0;0;*RIGGING:*

22;14;0;0;*COLOR:*

22;43;0;0;*DELIVERY DATE:*

25;31;1;1;*SPECIAL ORDER ITEMS*

27;17;0;0;*ITEM*

27;34;0;0;*DESCRIPTION*

27;60;0;0;*PRICE*

50;26;1;1;*Quality Boats Crafted By Hand*

C17;48;14;0;0;*HandCraft Boats*

C17;48.10;14;0;0;*123 Boat Way*

C17;49.8;14;0;0;*Boat Town, CA*

C17;50.6;19;0;0;*333444*

C17;51.4;14;0;0;*(714)555–0011*

STOP

Format

Form Examples and Exercises

6–43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ALPHA

[R;][E;][Cn;][AFn;L;][DIR;][UC;][DARK;]SR;SC;VE;HE;(D)text(D)

STOP

9. HandCraft Boats uses bar code type Code 128B (C128B) in many

applications. Use bar code C128B, height (Hn) of .5–inch, starting at

row (SR) 49, column (SC) 59, code the West Coast Sales Region as

*WC*, and print the data field (PDF) below the symbol.

NOTE: Due to space constraints, the C128B command below is separated

into two lines. During actual input, do not separate the command

parameters.

Enter

Format

BARCODE

C128B;H5;49;59

C128B;[VSCAN;][MAG;][Hn;][BFn;L;]

[DARK;]SR;SC

*WC*

PDF

[(D)datafield(D)]

[PDF[;LOC][;FONT]]

STOP

NOTE: The decimal point is not entered in the height parameter (H5) above

because values are expected in .10–inch increments. Values from 4

to 99 (.4–inch to 9.9 inches) are accepted.

10. Add the logo and end the Create Form mode. Use the Logo Call

command, specify the starting row (SR) at 12 and column (SC) at 18 as

shown on the grid and call the logo by name (HANDCRFT). (The

starting row and column of the logo refer to the upper left corner of the

grid used in the logo design.)

Enter

Format

LOGO

12;18;HANDCRFT

STOP

SR;SC;logoname[;DISK]

STOP

END

6–44

Form Examples and Exercises

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11. Execute the form (HCBOATS), return to the Normal mode (remember

the blank line before the NORMAL command), exit the file using your

system commands (if necessary), and print the document.

Enter

Format

~EXECUTE;HCBOATS

(cc)EXECUTE;formname[;PAGE

n][;FC][;DISK]

~NORMAL

(cc)NORMAL

PRINT HNDCFT.FOM (System Format)

NOTE: Always separate the EXECUTE and NORMAL commands by a

line.

Figure 6–13 shows the finished form. If Mr. Handcraft would like to

rearrange the words, change line thickness of a box, etc., simply reopen the

file and change the appropriate command lines. Otherwise, his salespeople

have a new form for notes on custom orders.

Form Examples and Exercises

6–45

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

hcform.ex

Figure 6–13. Completed Sample Form

6–46

Form Examples and Exercises

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Directory Example

The Directory command lists the contents of the IGP/PGL directory in the

printer system. The directory command provides the following information:

All form names currently defined

All logo names currently defined

The association of logos to forms

The amount of memory used for form storage

The amount of dynamic storage space used and available

A form will not execute unless enough room exists in the memory as

indicated in the work space bytes free portion of the directory listing. To

print the directory, open a file, input the directory command, exit the file, and

print.

For example (see Figure 6–14):

Enter

Format

DIRECT.FOM

~DIRECTORY

PRINT DIRECT.FOM

(System Format)

(cc)DIRECTORY

(System Format)

The Directory command can only be used when the IGP/PGL is in the

Normal mode. Upon completion of the directory listing, the IGP/PGL returns

to the Normal mode. If the IGP/PGL is not in the Normal mode, input the

Normal mode command before the Directory command.

Figure 6–14. Sample Printout

Form Examples and Exercises

6–47

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Delete Example

The Delete command deletes any individual form or logo from the IGP/PGL

memory module. The deletion of a form includes its directory entry and any

alphanumeric or vector information associated with it. The Delete command

is used only when the IGP/PGL is in the Normal mode.

Deletion of a logo includes its directory entry and its data in the logo storage

area. Deletion of a valid logo which is still combined with a form will not

cause an error at the time it is deleted; however, an error will occur if you

execute a form that contains a previously deleted logo.

From the directory printed in the preceding section, delete the practice form,

the HandCraft Logo, and the HandCraft Boats form. Similar to the format

used with other command sequences, the procedure is as follows: open a file,

input the commands, exit the file, and print. For example:

Enter

Format

DELETE.FRM

(System Format)

~DELETE FORM;PRACTICE

~DELETE FORM;HCBOATS

(cc)DELETE FORM;formname

~DELETE LOGO;HANDCRFT (cc)DELETE LOGO;logoname

PRINT DELETE.FRM (System Format)

NOTE: List the directory again to verify that the forms and logos were

deleted.

To delete a form or logo from the IGP/PGL memory module, add the DISK

parameter to the above DELETE FORM or DELETE LOGO command:

~DELETE FORM;formname;DISK

~DELETE LOGO;logoname;DISK

A form cannot execute if insufficient space exists in the IGP/PGL memory.

The directory Dynamic Work Space Bytes Free must be greater than the total

size (in bytes) of the form. Delete older forms or logos to allow memory

space for new forms and logos, or include the Delete command as the last

statement in a logo or form program to immediately delete the data after it is

processed. Creating a form (or logo) with the same name as an existing

IGP/PGL form (or logo) will automatically delete the existing form (or logo).

6–48

Form Examples and Exercises

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Solving Program Errors

If you make an error in the program to create a form or an element in the

form, a coded error message and program line containing the error will print

when the form is executed. These error codes are defined in the “Error

Codes” chapter.

To solve program errors, perform the following steps:

1. Locate the error message in the listing provided in the “Error Codes”

chapter for a description of the error.

2. Analyze the related portion of the program to find the error.

3. Correct the error and reprint the file containing the program.

4. If the error persists or you cannot locate it in the program, use the debug

parameter [/] in the Create command as described in the Error Codes

chapter. Print the file with the IGP/PGL program. The debug parameter

lists the program, line by line (including the error on the line where the

error occurs), followed by the error–free sections of the form. Correct

the error and print the file again. When the error has been corrected,

delete the debug parameter.

For example, assume you made two errors in the Box and Corner commands

input in steps 3 and 4 of the Form and Bar Code Example on page 6–19.

Using the debug parameter in the Create command produces the following

sample listing:

/PRACTICE

BOX

2;35;16:53;61

*** ERROR 24 : BOX format or delimiter error in input parameters

STOP

CORNER

3;300;13;57;64;5;7

*** ERROR 35 : CORNER vertical length VL out of bounds

*** ERROR 31 : CORNER starting row SR out of bounds

*** ERROR 39 : CORNER starting row SR > ending row ER

STOP

END

Form Examples and Exercises

6–49

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

From the description of the error messages and the incorrect line identified

by the error message, the errors are easily located and corrected. Notice a

colon was accidentally input in the Box command where a semicolon was

required (error number 24).

/PRACTICE

BOX

2;35;16:53;61

*** ERROR 24 : BOX format or delimiter error in input parameters

STOP

In the Corner command, the starting row was too large. This single input

error caused the vertical length of the corner to extend beyond the form

boundaries (error number 35), the starting row to begin outside the form

boundaries (error number 31), and the starting/ending row parameters to be

out of order (error number 39).

CORNER

3;300;13;57;64;5;7

*** ERROR 35 : CORNER vertical length VL out of bounds

*** ERROR 31 : CORNER starting row SR out of bounds

*** ERROR 39 : CORNER starting row SR > ending row ER

STOP

END

6–50

Form Examples and Exercises

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Multinational Character Sets

Chapter Contents

About the Multinational Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2

Character Sets Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2

Character Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3

Making Character Substitutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3

OCR Character Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6

Accessing Characters and Character Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7

Data Bit 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7

Power–Up Character Set Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7

User–Defined Set Command (USET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8

Character Set Selection Command (ISET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10

Multinational Character Set Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11

Multinational Character Sets

7–1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

About the Multinational Character Set

The Multinational Character Set accesses one of 32 international character

sets. Each character set is 96 characters long and can be accessed by

configuration selection or IGP/PGL command. Individual characters in the

font can be accessed with the use of data bit 8.

Character Sets Available

The Multinational Character Set provides the IGP/PGL with space for 32

character sets, 96 characters each. The character sets and their corresponding

set values are listed in Table 7–1.

Table 7–1. Multinational Character Sets and Set Values

Character Set

U.S. ASCII

German

Character Set

Dutch

Value

French

Swedish

Spanish

Danish

Italian

Reserved

11–23

24–31

Norwegian

Finnish

User–Defined Sets

English

Sets 0 through 10 are resident character sets. Sets 12 through 23 are reserved

spaces in font memory for future resident character sets. If a value from 12

through 23 is called when attempting to choose a character set, the character

font will default to ASCII. The last eight addressable character set values, 24

through 31, are reserved for user–defined sets. You can create custom

character sets from existing characters in font memory. If you select a set

value from 24 to 31 when no new character set has been created or assigned

that value, the character font will default to ASCII.

Refer to page 7–11 for printouts of the primary and extended character sets

and their corresponding values.

7–2

Multinational Character Sets

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Character Addresses

Both the ASCII and multinational character sets have hex values for each

character and symbol. The primary character set (ASCII characters) resides

at hex addresses ranging from 00 to 7F. The extended character set, which

contains the multinational characters, resides at hex addresses ranging from

80 to FF. Table 7–2 shows each multinational character substitution hex

value and the applicable ASCII hex values. To access the extended character

set, the IGP/PGL must be configured with the data bit 8 option enabled.

Making Character Substitutions

Multinational character sets are created by substituting the multinational

character values for the standard ASCII values. Each of the 12 multinational

character sets allows up to 16 character substitutions (located at 21, 22, 23,

24, 25, 26, 40, 5B, 5C, 5D, 5E, 60, 7B, 7C, 7D, and 7E hex). The most

common character substitutions specific to a particular country are provided

in each set and shown in Table 7–2.

For example, when the Danish character set (page 7–11) is selected, calling

character address cell 5B substitutes the Danish character residing at C6 (Æ)

from the Multinational Character Set (page 7–11); when the Spanish

character set (page 7–12) is selected, calling character address cell 7C

substitutes the Spanish character residing at F1 (ñ) from the Multinational

Character Set. These substitutions are automatically performed when a

particular Multinational Character Set is selected.

The entire symbol tables may also be mapped. To replace any of the symbol

sets, you must store in internal memory, a file with the new symbol set; and

you must BOOT with this file in memory. Thus, to set up a printer, you must

first download the file using the PTX_SETUP commands; and then cycle

power to start up with the new code table(s).

The file name should be 3XX.map, where XX is between 01 and 10, for

symbol sets; or 5XX.map, where XX is between 00 and 17, for overlay sets.

(Note that these correspond to the symbol set selections within PGL, LP+

and VGL.)

Each file contains only one set. Any ‘C’ style comments are allowed. The

table entries must be separated by a non-digit character, like a comma.

Multinational Character Sets

7–3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

If the table has n entries, they will be used to overwrite the first n entries of

the corresponding symbol set (or overlay set). Also, the hex representation of

the characters are not permitted (you must use the decimal character values.)

The error checking is not extensive, but if an error is found, e.g., missing ‘/’

at the end of comments or bad file name, etc., the mapping does not occur.

The set should be enclosed in brackets.

For example, a “normal” table of the 3XX.map format would probably

contain 256 different values, one for each code point. The values select

which value within the multinational character table to use for each code

point.

Leave locations 0—31 alone. They are special characters that are used

internally. They should always be mapped back to 0—31. Also, if you are

using the CG-Triumvirate font, then you will get wrong results.

The standard code table for it is not the multinational table, so the mappings

do not reselect from within the multinational table. You will really map from

one CG-Triumvirate character to another, not from the multinational table to

the CG-Triumvirate table. Finally, for PGL and VGL, the default symbol set

is 305, and the LP+ symbol set is 308.

The foreign language sets are:

500—Germany

501—Swedish

502—Danish

506—Dutch

507—French

508—Spanish

509—Italian

510—Turkish

503—Norwegian

504—Finnish

505—English

7–4

Multinational Character Sets

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 7–2. Substitution Set Hex Values

Character Set

U.S. ASCII

Danish

Substitution Hex Value

21 22 23 24 25 26 40 5B 5C 5D 5E 60 7B 7C 7D 7E

C6 D8 C5

B0 E6 F8 E5

Dutch

English

Finnish

C4 D6 C5

E4 F6 E5 FC

French

E0 FB E7 A7 F4 EA E9 F9 E8 EE

German

Italian

A7 C4 D6 DC

A7 B0 E9 83

E4 F6 FC DF

F9 E0 F2 E8 EC

Norwegian

Spanish

Swedish

Turkish

C9 C6 D8 C5 DC E9 E6 F8 E5 FC

C3 D1 D5 A1 E3 F1 F5 BF

C9 C4 D6 C5 DC E9 E4 F6 E5 FC

86 D6 DC 87 88 89 F6 FC 8A

84 C7 E7 85

Multinational Character Sets

7–5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OCR Character Sets

Purpose

Mode

Accesses OCR–A and OCR–B character sets.

CREATE, NORMAL and EXECUTE

See Comments

Format

Comments In the Create mode, you can access OCR fonts using the alphanumeric

command. Use the Cn parameter in the ALPHA command (“Commands”

chapter, page 4–12) for more information.

In the Normal and Execute modes, you can access OCR fonts using the

Compressed Print (Density) command (“Commands” chapter, page 4–33).

NOTE: OCR fonts are only available in 10 cpi.

7–6

Multinational Character Sets

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Accessing Characters and Character Sets

Data Bit 8

You can access individual characters using data bit 8 addressing. The primary

character set is ASCII. These character values reside at hex addresses 20

through 7F. The Multinational or extended character sets reside at hex

addresses 80 through FF and are accessible without reconfiguration.

NOTE: Data bit 8 must be set high so that Multinational or extended

character sets are accessible without reconfiguration.

Power–Up Character Set Selection

You can select any one of the twelve resident multinational character sets

shown in Table 7–1 (0 through 11) as the default character set at printer

power–up. The IGP/PGL configuration settings determine which character

set is the default character set at power–up. Refer to the “Installation and

Configuration” chapter to configure the IGP/PGL for a specific character set.

(See Select Font in the configuration menu.)

The character font selected at power–up will remain active until the ISET

command is selected or the configuration is changed. OCR and

user–definable character sets cannot be configured as the default character

set at printer power–up.

Multinational Character Sets

7–7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User–Defined Set Command (USET)

Purpose

Creates custom character sets (except OCR fonts) from existing characters

stored on the IGP/PGL memory module.

Mode

NORMAL

Format

(cc)USET n

ca;fa

END

(cc)

USET

Represents the Special Function Control Character.

The User Set command; enter USET.

Selects USET character set number; enter a value

ranging from 1 to 8.

Represents the ASCII character cell hex address, which

will have its contents replaced with the character

located in the font address (fa). The ca value must be

one of the 16 hex values specified in Table 7–2 on page

7–5.

Represents the hexadecimal value for the font address

of a specified character in the Multinational character

set (page 7–11) which will replace the current contents

of ca. The fa value is the character substitution for the

cell address (ca). The value of fa may range from 20 to

FF hex.

END

Ends the USET command.

Comments You can define up to 16 character substitutions for each of the eight

user–definable character sets. It is not necessary to address all 16 spaces

available for character substitutions with a single USET command.

The character sets in the USET command are numbered 1 through 8. The

character set values in the Character Set Selection (ISET) command (page

7–10) are numbered 24 through 31 and correspond to User Sets 1 through

8. The ISET command accesses and prints that custom character set.

7–8

Multinational Character Sets

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The USET and ISET commands are related as shown in Table 7–3.

Therefore, ISET;24 selects the substitution set defined as USET1, ISET;29

selects USET6, etc.

Table 7–3. USET–ISET Relationship

USETn

n = 1

ISET;n

n = 24

n = 25

n = 26

n = 27

n = 28

n = 29

n = 30

n = 31

n = 2

n = 3

n = 4

n = 5

n = 6

n = 7

n = 8

corresponds to

Example The following example defines User Set 1 to contain the Multinational font

addresses B1 (±), A1 (¡), and BF (¿) at the hex cell addresses 23, 24, and

25, respectively. Therefore, if ca = 23 and fa = B1, each time that cell

address 23 is received, it will select the character located at font address B1

(±).

~USET1

23;B1

24;A1

25;BF

END

User Set 1 now contains the following: the plus or minus sign ± (B1 hex) in

place of the number sign # (23 hex); the upside down exclamation point ¡

(A1 hex) in place of the dollar sign $ (24 hex); and the upside down

question mark ¿ (BF hex) in place of the percent sign % (25 hex). To print

User Set 1, you must use the ISET command discussed on page 7–10.

Multinational Character Sets

7–9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Character Set Selection Command (ISET)

Purpose

Accesses one of the 32 multinational character sets from Table 7–3. Use

this command to access a different character set from the configured

power–up default character set.

Mode

NORMAL, CREATE, and EXECUTE

Format

In Normal and Execute modes:

(cc)ISET; n

In the Create mode (SFCC not required): ISET; n

(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Character.

ISET

The Multinational Character Set command; enter

ISET.

The character substitution set number; enter a value

ranging from 0 to 31. Character sets 0 through 23

represent resident character sets. Values from 24

through 31 correspond to the customized USET

character sets 1 through 8, respectively.

For example, refer to Table 7–3 on page 7–9. If you

want to use the User Set 1 created in the example on

page 7–9, call ISET;24. Similarly, if you want User

Set 5 that you had previously defined, call ISET;28 to

select and print the User Set 5 substitution set.

Comments You can issue the ISET command as many times within a form as needed.

The character set selected will remain active until a new character set is

selected. If you choose an incorrect character set value or make a syntax

error, an error message will result. If a value for n is not specified, an error

message will print.

Using the ISET command in the Execute mode declares the character set

for use in conjunction with the dynamic data within that Execute command.

Fixed form data specified in the Create mode is not affected by an ISET

command in the Execute mode. The character set selected will remain in

effect until another character set is selected.

7–10

Multinational Character Sets

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Multinational Character Sets

7–11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7–12

Multinational Character Sets

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Multinational Character Sets

7–13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7–14

Multinational Character Sets

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Error Codes

Chapter Contents

The Purpose of Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–2

Horizontal Line Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–3

Vertical Line Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–4

Box Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–5

Corner Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–6

Alpha Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–8

Logo Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–10

Create Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–12

Execute Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–14

Miscellaneous Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–16

Bar Code Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–18

Reverse Print Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–21

Incremental Fields Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–22

Multinational Character Set Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–23

Font Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–24

Error Codes

8–1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Purpose of Error Codes

The IGP/PGL provides coded error messages to assist in “debugging”

programs. The printer will print an error message number and the program

line which contains the error when an error is detected. To help determine

exactly where the error occurred, use the following debug command

sequence:

(CC)CREATE;/FORM NAME

The slash (/) places the IGP/PGL in a debug mode, and the program prints,

line by line, with the error number and message printed below the specific

error in the program. The error–free portions of the form will print following

the program. After correcting the error(s), print the file again. When the

errors have been corrected, delete the slash. (A sample debug listing is shown

in “Solving Program Errors” on page 6–49.)

In the Execute mode, that part of the form which was correctly defined and

stored during the Create mode will print, including any dynamic data and

overlay text which was accepted before the error occurred. (Sections

containing errors must be corrected before storage in the Directory can take

place.) Any error messages will print following the printed form, and

processing will continue in the Normal mode.

In the Create Form or Create Logo mode, any error messages will print first,

followed by that part of the form/logo which was correctly defined.

Incorrectly defined elements are excluded from the form/logo.

The error codes are broken down into the categories listed in the Chapter

Table of Contents, on page 8–1. In each category, the number preceding each

error message is the actual error code reported by the printer, and the error

shown in bold is the error message printed.

8–2

Error Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Horizontal Line Errors

HORiZontal line starting row SR out of bounds

The row specified by the second parameter in the horizontal line command

places the horizontal line outside the boundaries of the form.

HORiZontal line starting column SC out of bounds

The left (starting) column of the horizontal line specified by the third

parameter in the horizontal line command places the horizontal line outside

the boundaries of the form.

HORiZontal line ending column EC out of bounds

The right (ending) column of the horizontal line specified by the fourth

parameter in the horizontal line command places the horizontal line outside

the boundaries of the form.

HORiZontal line format or delimiter error

Some type of format or delimiter error was detected in the parameters of the

horizontal line command. This error is usually caused by one or more of the

following:

a. A missing semicolon;

b. A colon in place of a semicolon;

c. Too many or too few parameters in the command string;

d. Alpha characters instead of numeric characters in the parameters.

Insufficient memory to store the HORiZontal line

No more room in the IGP/PGL memory exists for another horizontal line.

The rest of the horizontal line commands are flushed until the Stop command

is found. Processing will then continue normally. To create space in the

IGP/PGL memory, delete forms with horizontal line elements that are no

longer required.

HORiZontal line starting column SC > ending column EC

The left (starting) column parameter of the horizontal line command is

greater than or equal to the right (ending) column parameter.

HORiZontal line thickness LT error

The thickness of the horizontal line specified by the first parameter in the

horizontal line command is incorrect. This error is usually caused by

specifying a thickness of zero.

08–09 Not defined.

Error Codes

8–3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Vertical Line Errors

VERTical line starting column SC out of bounds

The column specified by the second parameter in the vertical line command

places the vertical line outside the form boundaries.

VERTical line starting row SR out of bounds

The upper (starting) row of the vertical line specified by the third parameter

in the vertical line command places the vertical line outside the boundaries of

the form.

VERTical line ending row ER out of bounds

The lower (ending) row of the vertical line specified by the fourth parameter

in the vertical line command places the vertical line outside the boundaries of

the form.

VERTical line format or delimiter error

Some type of format or delimiter error was detected in the parameters of the

vertical line command. This error is usually caused by one or more of the

following:

a. A missing semicolon;

b. A colon in place of a semicolon;

c. Too many or too few parameters in the command string;

d. Alpha characters instead of numeric characters in the parameters.

Insufficient memory to store the VERTical line

No more room in the IGP/PGL memory exists for another vertical line. The

rest of the vertical line commands are flushed until the Stop command is

found. Processing will then continue normally. To create space in the

IGP/PGL memory, delete forms with vertical line elements that are no longer

required.

VERTical line starting row SR > ending row ER

The upper (starting) row parameter of the vertical line command is greater

than or equal to the lower (ending) row parameter.

VERTical line thickness LT error

The thickness of the vertical line specified by the first parameter in the

vertical line command is incorrect. This error is usually caused by specifying

a thickness of zero.

17–19 Not defined.

8–4

Error Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Box Errors

BOX starting column SC out of bounds

The left (starting) column specified by the third parameter in the box

command places the box outside the form boundaries.

BOX starting row SR out of bounds

The upper (starting) row of the box specified by the second parameter in the

box command will place the box outside the boundaries of the form.

BOX ending column EC out of bounds

The right (ending) column specified by the fifth parameter in the box

command places the box outside the form boundaries.

BOX ending row ER out of bounds

The lower (ending) row of the box specified by the fourth parameter in the

box command will place the box outside the boundaries of the form.

BOX format or delimiter error in input parameters

Some type of format or delimiter error was detected in the parameters of the

box command. This error is usually caused by one or more of the following:

a. A missing semicolon;

b. A colon in place of a semicolon;

c. Too many or too few parameters in the command string;

d. Alpha characters instead of numeric characters in the parameters.

Insufficient memory to store the BOX

No more room in the IGP/PGL memory exists for another box. The rest of

the box commands are flushed until the Stop command is found. Processing

will then continue normally. To create space in the IGP/PGL memory, delete

forms with box elements that are no longer required.

BOX starting column SC > ending column EC

The left (starting) column parameter of the box command is greater than or

equal to the right (ending) column parameter.

BOX starting row SR > ending row ER

The upper (starting) row parameter of the box command is greater than or

equal to the lower (ending) row parameter.

BOX line thickness LT error

The thickness of the box specified by the first parameter in the box command

is incorrect. This error is usually caused by specifying a thickness of zero.

Not defined.

Error Codes

8–5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corner Errors

CORNER starting column SC out of bounds

The left (starting) column specified by the third parameter in the corner

command places the corner outside the form boundaries.

CORNER starting row SR out of bounds

The upper (starting) row of the corner specified by the second parameter in

the corner command will place the corner outside the boundaries of the form.

CORNER ending column EC out of bounds

The right (ending) column specified by the fifth parameter in the corner

command places the corner outside the form boundaries.

CORNER ending row ER out of bounds

The lower (ending) row of the corner specified by the fourth parameter in the

corner command will place the corner outside the boundaries of the form.

CORNER horizontal length HL out of bounds

The length of the horizontal arms of the corner specified by the seventh

parameter in the corner command will cause parts of the corner to extend

outside the form boundaries.

CORNER vertical length VL out of bounds

The length of the vertical arms of the corner specified by the sixth parameter

in the corner command will cause parts of the corner to extend above or

below the boundaries of the form.

CORNER format or delimiter error in input parameters

Some type of format or delimiter error was detected in the parameters of the

corner command. This error is usually caused by one or more of the

following:

a. A missing semicolon;

b. A colon in place of a semicolon;

c. Too many or too few parameters in the command string;

d. Alpha characters instead of numeric characters in the parameters.

Insufficient memory to store the CORNER

No more room in the IGP/PGL memory exists for another corner. The rest of

the corner commands are flushed until the Stop command is found.

Processing will then continue normally. To create space in the IGP/PGL

memory, delete forms with corner elements that are no longer required.

8–6

Error Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CORNER starting column SC > ending column EC

The left (starting) column parameter of the corner command is greater than

or equal to the right (ending) column parameter.

CORNER starting row SR > ending row ER

The upper (starting) row parameter of the corner command is greater than or

equal to the lower (ending) row parameter.

Error Codes

8–7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Alpha Errors

ALPHA leading and trailing delimiters mismatched

The leading delimiter (printable character) of the actual text string was not

matched with an ending delimiter before the line terminator was found.

ALPHA starting row SR out of bounds

The starting row parameter in the Alpha command will cause the text string

to print either above or below the limits of the form.

NOTE: Expanded print text strings expand up from the specified row. This

could cause an attempt to print the text string above the top of the

form and generate the error message.

ALPHA starting column SC out of bounds

The starting column parameter in the Alpha command is either extending the

alpha string beyond the left margin of the form or the starting column

parameter, plus the actual length of the text is extending the string beyond

the right margin of the page.

ALPHA string length > 255 characters

The string contains more than 255 characters.

ALPHA format or delimiter error in input parameters

Some type of format or delimiter error was detected in the parameters of the

alpha command. This error is usually caused by one or more of the

following:

a. A missing semicolon;

b. A colon in place of a semicolon;

c. Too many or too few parameters in the command string;

d. Alpha characters instead of numeric characters in the parameters.

Insufficient memory to store the ALPHA string

No more room in the IGP/PGL memory exists for another alpha string. The

rest of the Alpha commands are flushed until the Stop command is found.

Processing of the form will then continue normally. To create space in the

IGP/PGL memory, delete forms with alpha string elements that are no longer

required.

8–8

Error Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ALPHA X expansion HE and Y expansion VE must be zero

When the expanded character parameters VE and HE are used within the

ALPHA command, both values must be either zero or non–zero values. If the

elongated characters parameter [E] or the compressed characters parameter

[Cn] is used in the ALPHA command, the VE and HE values must be set to

ALPHA X expansion factor HE out of bounds (> 139)

The horizontal expansion factor is greater than 139.

ALPHA Y expansion factor VE out of bounds (> 139)

The vertical expansion factor is greater than 139.

Compression Cn or Density error (10, 10A, 10B, 12, 13, 15, 17, 20)

The optional compression parameter (Cn) which defines the horizontal pitch

of the text was specified incorrectly. The pitches currently available are 10,

10A, 10B, 12, 13, 15, 17, and 20 cpi.

Error Codes

8–9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Logo Errors

LOGO horizontal width HL > 240 or dot row > HL

a. The horizontal width of the logo is equal to zero or greater than 240.

The IGP/PGL automatically reverts to Normal mode when this occurs.

b. A dot position specified in the logo program exceeds the specified

horizontal width of the logo. When this occurs, the buffer is flushed

until a line terminator is found, and then logo construction continues

normally.

LOGO vertical length VL > 252 or dot row n > VL

a. The vertical length of the logo is equal to zero or greater than 252. The

IGP/PGL automatically reverts to Normal mode when this occurs.

b. A dot row specified in the logo program exceeds the specified vertical

length of the logo. When this occurs, the buffer is flushed until a line

terminator is found, and then logo construction continues normally.

LOGO hyphen syntax error in input parameters

The beginning or ending dots are out of order, or a parameter is missing. The

buffer is flushed until a line terminator is found, and then logo construction

continues normally.

Insufficient memory to create the LOGO

No more room exists in IGP/PGL memory to construct a logo for the size

specified. When this occurs, the IGP/PGL automatically reverts to Normal

mode. To create space in IGP/PGL memory, delete forms with logo elements

(including the logos) that are no longer required.

LOGO format or delimiter error

Some type of format or delimiter error was detected in the Logo command. If

this occurs while specifying the size and name of the logo, the IGP/PGL

automatically reverts to the Normal mode. If this occurs during the actual

construction of the logo, the buffer is flushed until a line terminator is found,

and then logo construction continues normally.

LOGO call not previously defined

An attempt was made in the Create Form mode to incorporate an undefined

logo into a form. This error is not generated during the Logo Form mode.

When this error occurs, the buffer is flushed until a line terminator is found,

and then forms creation continues normally.

8–10

Error Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Insufficient memory for another LOGO call

IGP/PGL memory cannot store another logo call. To create space in the

IGP/PGL memory, delete forms with logo elements (including the logos) no

longer required.

LOGO call starting row SR out of bounds

During form creation, the parameter specifying the row position of a logo

places the logo above or below the margins of the form. The buffer is flushed

until a line terminator is found, and then processing continues normally.

LOGO call starting column SC out of bounds

During form creation, the parameter specifying the column position of a logo

places the logo outside the form boundaries. When this occurs, the buffer is

flushed until a line terminator is found, and then processing continues

normally.

Color or GRAY scale not supported with LOGOS

Color or gray scale information was received from the TIFF data, but it is not

supported with the LOGO command.

Error Codes

8–11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Create Errors

Directory full – cannot CREATE the form or LOGO

The directory is full, or no more room exists in the IGP/PGL memory for

another form. When this occurs, the IGP/PGL automatically reverts to the

Normal mode. To create space in the IGP/PGL memory, delete forms that are

no longer required.

CREATE function unrecognized

An unrecognizable command is entered during the Create Form mode. At

this point, the buffer is flushed until a Stop command is found, and then

processing continues.

CREATE horizontal duplication parameter HDUP error

Either a format error was detected or a parameter was exceeded. The

duplication number must be no greater than 255, and the offset must be no

greater than 792 (dot scale). If this error occurs, the Horizontal Duplication

command is ignored, and forms processing continues.

CREATE vertical duplication parameter VDUP error

Either a format error was detected, or a parameter was exceeded. The

duplication number must be no greater than 255 and the offset must be no

greater than the specified length of the form. If this error occurs, the Vertical

Duplication command is ignored, and forms processing continues.

CREATE scale factor parameter SCALE invalid

Either a format error was detected, or a parameter was specified incorrectly.

The vertical lines per inch can be specified as 1 to the target DPI. The

horizontal characters per inch can be specified only as 10, 12, 13, 15, 17 or

20 cpi. If this error occurs, the Scale command is ignored and forms

processing continues.

CREATE page starting row PAGE SR out of bounds

When you specify the position of the page parameters with the Page

command in the Create Form mode, the row position specified will place the

page number above or below the boundaries of the form. When this error

occurs, the IGP/PGL will automatically revert to the Normal mode.

8–12

Error Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CREATE page starting column PAGE SC out of bounds

When you specify the position of the page parameters in the Create

command, the column position specified will place the page number outside

the form boundaries. When this error occurs, the IGP/PGL will automatically

revert to the Normal mode.

CREATE STOP command missing

This error occurs when the IGP/PGL receives a new function command, an

End command, or a mode command without receiving a Stop command. The

IGP/PGL will continue to process subsequent commands correctly.

Insufficient memory to store the SETUP program

No more room in the IGP/PGL memory exists for storing the SETUP

routine.

Insufficient memory to store the form

The directory is full, or no more room exists in the IGP/PGL memory for

another form. When this occurs, the IGP/PGL automatically reverts to the

Normal mode. To create space in the IGP/PGL memory, delete forms that are

no longer required.

Error Codes

8–13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Execute Errors

EXECUTE form count parameter FC error

This error occurs when the parameter specifying the number of blank forms

to print was entered incorrectly. When this error occurs, the IGP/PGL will

automatically revert to the Normal mode. Form count can be from 1 to

65,535.

EXECUTE/DELETE form not found in the directory

An attempt was made to execute or delete a form which does not exist in the

forms directory. When this error occurs, the IGP/PGL reverts to the Normal

mode.

EXECUTE EVFU load error

This error is generated only during the Execute Form mode while

programming the EVFU. If more channels than lines per physical page are

specified during a load sequence, this error is generated, and the IGP/PGL

automatically reverts to the Normal mode.

EXECUTE EVFU terminator invalid

This error is generated only during the Execute Form mode. The EVFU

LOAD is missing an END LOAD code. If the line terminator cannot be

deciphered, an error is generated, and the IGP/PGL reverts to the Normal

mode.

EXECUTE form too wide for current page setting

The form was defined in one orientation while sent to print in another

orientation. Use the debug slash (/) when creating a form to show which

element is out of bounds (see page C–2).

EXECUTE form too long for current page setting

The form was defined in one orientation while sent to print in another

orientation. Use the debug slash (/) when creating a form to show which

element is out of bounds (see page C–2).

EXECUTE page number error

An error was made while specifying the page number used with the form

being executed. This error can be generated because of incorrect format or a

page number that is too large. The specified page number can range from 0

to 99,999,999. Since the page number is part of the Execute command, the

IGP/PGL will automatically revert to the Normal mode.

8–14

Error Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EXECUTE format or delimiter error

A format or delimiter error was detected in the Execute command; the

IGP/PGL will automatically revert to the Normal mode. This error is usually

caused by one or more of the following:

a. A missing semicolon;

b. A colon in place of a semicolon;

c. Too many or too few parameters in the command string;

d. Alpha characters instead of decimal digits in the parameters;

e. Page command misspelled when specifying the page number.

Insufficient memory to EXECUTE the form

Insufficient memory was available to recall and execute a form. The

IGP/PGL will automatically revert to the Normal mode.

Not defined.

Error Codes

8–15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Miscellaneous Errors

Special function must be called from the NORMAL mode

This special function must be called from the Normal mode and not the

Create Form or Execute Form mode. This error is generally due to a missing

End command in the Create Form mode. For example, an attempt to enter the

Create Form mode while executing a form will cause the IGP/PGL

automatically to revert to the Normal mode.

No such special function

The special function call was unrecognizable. The IGP/PGL will

automatically revert to the Normal mode.

Numeric value expected in input parameter

Characters other than numeric digits (0–9) are encountered where digits are

expected.

Decimal input error in input parameter

The parameter expected was a decimal number. Either the number was not

there, or it was too large (greater than 65,535). This error can also be caused

by entering an alpha character instead of a numeric character.

Missing or wrong delimiter – must be a semicolon ;

The delimiter is either wrong or missing. The delimiter expected is a

semicolon.

Missing or wrong delimiter – must be a colon :

DENSITY param error – 10, 10A, 10B, 12, 13, 15, 17, or 20

The parameters of the Density command are improperly specified. The

densities currently implemented are 10, 10A, 10B, 12, 13, 15, 17, and 20

characters per inch. The command is ignored and processing continues.

LPI parameters error – must be 1 – target dot size

The parameters of the LPI command are improperly specified. The only

parameters implemented are 6, 8, 9, and 10 lpi. The command is ignored and

processing continues.

Not defined.

8–16

Error Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EXPAND parameters out of bounds or format error

The parameters of the Expand command are improperly specified. Either the

parameters are out of bounds, or some type of format error was detected. The

command is ignored, and processing continues.

156

170

171

No such CONFIGuration option

PAPER command syntax error

Invalid PAPER parameter error – out of range

Error Codes

8–17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Bar Code Errors

Insufficient memory to store the BARCODE

No more room exists in the IGP/PGL memory for another bar code. The rest

of the bar code commands are flushed until the Stop command is found.

Processing will then continue.

ALPHA/BARCODE syntax error

Some type of syntax (format) error was detected in the parameters of the bar

code command. This error is usually caused by one or more of the following:

a. Misspelled keywords;

b. Lowercase used;

c. A missing semicolon;

d. A colon in place of a semicolon;

e. An ending delimiter for the data field was not found;

f. Too many or too few parameters in the command string.

The rest of the command line is flushed until the Stop command is found.

Processing will then continue.

BARCODE magnification factor MAG out of bounds

The magnification factor specified in the bar code command is out of

bounds. Refer to the applicable section in the “Bar Codes” chapter to

determine the acceptable magnification values for the bar code symbol being

used.

BARCODE starting row SR out of bounds

The starting row parameter in the bar code command will cause the bar code

symbol to print either above or below the limits of the form.

BARCODE starting column SC out of bounds

The starting column parameter in the bar code command will cause the bar

code symbol to print either beyond the left margin or the right margin of the

form.

BARCODE height Hn out of bounds – must be 4 through 99

The height parameter specified in the bar code command is out of bounds.

Acceptable values are 4 through 99.

BARCODE data field has illegal character/format

A character in the data field was not recognized as an acceptable character.

Refer to the applicable section in the “Bar Codes” chapter to determine the

8–18

Error Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

acceptable characters for the bar code symbol being used. The missing

ending delimiter also causes this error.

BARCODE data field too short or too long

The data field in the bar code command has too few or too many data

characters. Refer to the applicable section in the “Bar Codes” chapter to

determine the acceptable number of data characters for the bar code symbol

being used.

BARCODE symbol(s) exceeds the form length

The bar code command causes a bar code symbol to print below the limits of

the form. This error occurs on the data field line of the bar code.

BARCODE symbol(s) exceeds the form width

The bar code command causes a bar code symbol to print beyond the right

margin. This error occurs on the data field line of the bar code.

100

101

BARCODE variable ratio 0 or not ascending.

BARCODE PDF not allowed or error – LOC: A or B – FONT: N, O, X

or S

Either the alternate font was selected for a bar code or an invalid parameter

was used. Acceptable parameters must be “N” for the normal font, “O” for

the OCR–A optional font, “X” for the OCR–B optional font, or “S” to

suppress printing of the data field.

102

103

104

PDF417 bar code sizing parameter illegal or too small for data.

PDF417 security level has illegal value or format.

Dynamic BARCODE data field BFn not previously defined

Dynamic data field designated in the Execute Form mode was not defined in

the Create Form mode.

105

Dynamic ALPHA/BARCODE field number AFn/BFn error – must be

1–255

Dynamic alpha field number (AFn) or bar code field number (BFn) must

range from 1 to 255.

106

107

Not defined.

Dynamic ALPHA data field AFn not previously defined

The dynamic alpha field number called for was not previously defined in the

Create Form mode.

Error Codes

8–19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

108

109

Not defined.

Dynamic BARCODE field longer than previously defined

The BARCODE data provided exceeds the maximum length for the bar code

selected.

110

SFCC decimal input error – must be 01 to 255

The hexadecimal value on the ASCII chart for the Special Function Control

Character is not valid. Refer to page 2–4 to select a valid SFCC.

8–20

Error Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Reverse Print Errors

111

112

113

114

REVERSE format error in input parameters

Re–enter the command with proper format.

REVERSE starting row SR/ending row ER out of bounds

Exceeds the value specified to reverse the element.

REVERSE starting SC/ending column EC out of bounds

Exceeds the value specified to reverse the element.

Insufficient memory to store the REVERSE element

Insufficient memory space available for reversed print requirements.

115–116 Not defined.

117

118

119

Unusable or illegal raster data.

Unsupported raster image type.

Unsupported raster compression type.

120–125 Not defined.

126

LFORMx form length parameter n error

The number of lines exceeds 66 (for 6 lpi) or 88 (for 8 lpi) lines when using

the LFORMx command.

127

128

Form length > physical page length

The form length specified exceeds the paper size loaded in the printer.

FORM/LOGO name is not a legal file name

The file name exceeds the twelve-character limitation, or an invalid character

was used in the file name. Refer to IGP/PGL Command Standards in the

“Commands” chapter.

129

Not defined.

Error Codes

8–21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Incremental Fields Errors

130

131

Not defined.

Incremental STEPMASK parameter error

A semicolon is missing after the STEPMASK data.

132

133

134

Incremental REPEAT/RESET parameter error

An illegal RPT or RST parameter value was found in the incremental

command. The value must range from 1 to 65,535.

Incremental STEPMASK/STARTDATA length error

The dynamic stepmask exceeded created field length or start data exceeded

stepmask.

Incremental EXECUTE command error

An illegal IRST or ICNT parameter value was found in the Execute

command. The value must range from 1 to 65,535.

135

136

Not defined.

Incremental STEPMASK/STARTDATA mismatched

The STARTDATA value must be A–Z or 0–9, when the STEPMASK value

is a value from 0–9.

137–139 Not defined.

140

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

PMODE or SMODE not the first command in the CREATE mode.

PMODE or SMODE syntax error.

PMODE or SMODE printer type PT parameter error.

PMODE or SMODE scaling parameter error.

PMODE or SMODE exit mode (EM) parameter error.

PMODE entries exceeded – maximum = 8.

Not defined.

8–22

Error Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Multinational Character Set Errors

150

ISET character selection parameter n error – 00 to 31

An ISET character set selection parameter value between 0 and 31 was

expected. Error was caused possibly by an invalid numeric value or an alpha

character.

151

152

USET decimal input error in input parameter

The USET command was expecting a decimal parameter and either received

none or received an alpha character.

USET character set n parameter error

A USET character set selection parameter value between 1 and 8 was

expected. Error was caused possibly by an invalid numeric value or an alpha

character.

153

USET substituted character illegal – must be 1 of 16

During character substitution in the USET command, the hex value for the

character being replaced must be one of the specified 16 hex values. Only the

following hex values (Ca) can be replaced by another hex value (Fa): 21, 22,

23, 24, 25, 26, 40, 5B, 5C, 5D, 5E, 60, 7B, 7C, 7D, 7E.

154

155

USET defined character illegal – must be hex 20–FF

During the USET command, the hex value for the substituted character (Fa)

must range between 20 and FF hex. The value given may be out of bounds.

USET syntax error – END command is expected

An END command is expected when the USET character set definition is

completed.

156

157

No such CONFIGuration option

Left or Top/Bottom margin too large for the current page size.

158–159 Not defined.

Error Codes

8–23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Font Errors

160

161

162

163

FONT command parameter error

The FACE # parameter is either missing a space between the parameter and

its value, or a semicolon is missing between font parameters.

Illegal FONT typeface value – must be (9)0000–(9)9999

An illegal FONT typeface value was used. FONT typeface values range from

90000 to 99999, or 0 to 9999.

Illegal FONT bolding factor – must be ON(1) or OFF(0)

An illegal FONT bolding value was used. ON (or 1) or OFF (or 0) must be

entered.

Illegal FONT slant – must be LEFT (–1), OFF (0), or RIGHT (1)

An illegal FONT slant value was used. LEFT (or –1), OFF (or 0), or RIGHT

(or 1) must be entered.

164

165

Illegal FONT point size – must be 4–999

An illegal FONT point size was used. Valid values range from 4 to 999.

Illegal FONT symbol set value

An invalid SYMSET parameter value was used. Valid parameter values are 0

to 31.

166–169 Not defined.

170

171

PAPER command syntax error

Invalid PAPER parameter error – out of range

8–24

Error Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Standard ASCII Character Set

BITS

B4 B3 B2 B1

KEY

OCTAL

DECIMAL

HEX

ESC

ASCII CHARACTER

BITS

COLUMN

B4 B3 B2 B1

ROW

100

120

140

160

112

0 0

NUL

SOH

DLE

101

121

141

161

DC1

113

0 0

(XON)

102

122

142

162

114

DC2

”

STX

ETX

EOT

ENQ

ACK

BEL

103

123

143

163

115

DC3

0 0

[

(XOFF)

104

124

144

100

164

116

DC4

NAK

SYN

0 1

105

125

145

101

165

117

{

106

126

146

102

166

118

’

107

127

147

103

167

119

0 1

1 0

ETB 23

110

130

150

104

170

120

CAN

(

)

111

131

151

105

171

121

EM 25

0 A

112

132

152

106

172

122

1 0

SUB

113

133

153

173

ESC

;

0 B

107

123

0 C

114

134

154

108

174

124

1 1

115

135

155

175

–

]

}

0 D

109

125

0 E

116

136

156

110

176

126

1 1

0 F

117

137

157

111

177

127

DEL

ASCII Character Set

A–1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

A–2

ASCII Character Set

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Grid Programs and Samples

The Standard Grid – The standard grid is used for form design. The program for the standard grid is

listed below, and a sample of the standard grid follows on the next page. Photocopy the grid provided

or enter the grid program and make your own printout.

grid.ex

Grid Programs and Samples

B–1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

B–2

Grid Programs and Samples

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Logo Grid – The program for a logo grid is listed below and the sample grid follows. It is not the

full size logo grid; the grid can measure up to 240 columns wide by 252 rows high for a logo 4 x 3.5

inches. Photocopy the grid or enter the grid program to obtain a printout.

logogrid.ex

Grid Programs and Samples

B–3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

B–4

Grid Programs and Samples

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Page Boundaries

Paper Selection and Maximum Values

Most Create Form mode commands require you to identify specific form

boundaries using the SR, SC, ER, EC parameters. This appendix addresses

the page boundaries affecting IGP/PGL products for both cut–sheet page

printers and continuous form printers.

All printers have maximum print boundaries according to the printer type

and paper size selected. Refer to your printer Setup Guide for the specific

page boundaries associated with your printer. Table C–1 shows the print

boundaries for page printers using several different widths and lengths.

Note that while both cut–sheet page printers and continuous form printers

have specific maximum width values based on paper size, continuous form

printers are not bound by the same maximum page length values; on a

continuous form printer, if you specify a page length exceeding the actual

paper size, the form will continue to print until it is completed.

The maximum dot values such as those shown in Table C–1 are necessary to

determine the maximum printable area on your form for your printer when

modifying top/bottom margin settings or offsetting the values for left margin

print positions. The following pages explain how to determine the

Top/Bottom Margin and Left Margin requirements for your printer.

Create Form Mode

In the Create Form mode, both the form’s length and width used for

boundary checking may be specified by the user. However, if the form size is

not specified, the form length defaults to 4 and the width is not checked.

Boundary checking for form elements is performed only when the form

length is specified.

Page Boundaries

C–1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Execute Form Mode

In the Execute Form mode, use the following guidelines to determine if a

form will print on the current page size.

Not User–Defined

If the form’s length/width is not user–defined, and the minimum length/width

is greater than the current page length/ width, minus the margins, then the

result will be error 74 or 75.

User–defined

If the form’s length/width is user–defined greater than the current page

length/ width, minus the margins, then the result will be error 74 or 75.

Not–defined

If the form’s length/width is not–defined and the minimum length/width is

less than or equal to the current page length/width, minus the margins, then

the form length/width will equal the page length/width, minus the margins.

C–2

Page Boundaries

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table C–1. Paper Sizes and Maximum Print Area

Maximum Dot Value*

Dimensions (Inches) Page Width Page Length

Paper Size

Letter

Legal

Computer

8.0 x 11

8.5 x 11

8.5 x 14

8.268 x 11.693

6.929 x 9.842

13.2 x 11

481

511

497

416

793

1009

842

709

793

*How to calculate Maximum Dot Values:

Page Length X 72 dpi minus Top and Bottom Margin Values + 1 =

maximum height value;

Page Width x 60 dpi minus Left Margin Value + 1 = maximum width value.

Values exceeding maximum values will produce an error message.

NOTE: Due to the printing properties of some printers (i.e., cut–sheet

pages), the Starting Row and Starting Column on paper may vary

slightly, possibly truncating some of the top and bottom print rows.

You can avoid truncating print by setting top/bottom margins as

described on page C–4, or as explained in your printer Setup

Guide).

Page Boundaries

C–3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Top/Bottom Margins

Using dot values to identify maximum vertical print positions, the page

boundary parameters of an 11–inch form has 792 dot rows at n/72–inch

vertically (72 dpi X 11 inches). (See Figure C–1.)

With no Top/Bottom Margin configuration setting on an 11–inch form, the

first print position is Starting Row 1, Starting Column 1 (A, Figure C–1).

However, if a Top/Bottom Margin value is set at 10, then Starting Row 1 is

adjusted down by 10 dot rows (B, Figure C–1), and the Ending Row is

adjusted up 10 dot rows (C, Figure C–1), thereby reducing the maximum

vertical printable area to 773 dots (793 – [10 + 10]). The greater the

top/bottom margin setting, the smaller the printable area on the form.

NOTE: The Top/Bottom margin setting on your Line-Matrix Printer

Emulation must match the IGP/PGL Top/Bottom margin

configuration setting.

Maximum Character Column

Maximum Horizontal Dot 51

Maximum Vertical

Print Area (772 dots)

Maximum Character Row 67

Maximum Vertical Dot 793

Figure C–1. Top/Bottom Margin Example

C–4

Page Boundaries

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setting Left Margins

Using dot values to identify maximum horizontal print positions, the page

boundary parameters of an 8–1/2–inch wide form (85 character columns) has

510 dot columns and n/60–inch horizontally (60 dpi X 8.5 inches). (See

Figure C–1.) Setting a Left Margin value repositions the Starting Column 1

position by the degree of offset required. This offset can be a 0, a positive, or

negative value. The following examples explain how setting the Left Margin

affects printed output:

No Left Margin Setting – When the Left Margin configuration setting is 0

on an 8–1/2–inch form, the Starting Column is 1, and the Ending Column is

511 (Figure C–2, A and B, respectively).

Positive Left Margin Setting – When the Left Margin setting is 20 on an

8–1/2–inch form, the left margin is offset by 20 dots, and that 20th dot

position becomes Starting Column 1 in IGP/PGL memory (A, Figure C–3).

This 20 dots also offsets the Ending Column by 20 dots, thus narrowing the

maximum print width on the form from 511 to 491 dots (B, Figure C–3).

Negative Left Margin Setting – With a Left Margin setting of –20 on an

8–1/2–inch form, the left margin is offset –20 dots, and that –20 becomes the

Starting Column 1 in IGP/PGL memory (A, Figure C–4). This –20 offset

appears to expand the horizontal printable area to 531 dots (B, Figure C–4);

however, the expanded area is actually beyond the addressable range of the

8–1/2–inch–wide form containing the –20 offset position and is, therefore,

not accessible. Column 21 is the left–most addressable area on the page.

NOTE: Negative Left Margin configuration is a method of offsetting and

printing an existing IGP/PGL file which may otherwise require

modification in order to orient the output on the page properly. Use

this option if your IGP/PGL file was written for applications where

the leftmost printable area is not designated as the first printable

character column on the form.

Page Boundaries

C–5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maximum Character Column

Maximum Horizontal Dot 51

Maximum Horizontal

Print Area (510 dots)

Figure C–2. Left Margin Example – No Setting

Dot Column 20

Becomes Column 1

Maximum Horizontal Dot Column

(511) becomes 491 due to

+20 offset

Maximum Horizontal

Print Area (490 dots)

Figure C–3. Left Margin Setting +20 Example

C–6

Page Boundaries

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Dot Column –20

Becomes Column 1

Maximum Horizontal Dot

Column 531

Nonprintable area due

to –20 left margin

offset

Maximum Horizontal Printable Area

(510 dots)

Figure C–4. Left Margin –20 Setting Example

Page Boundaries

C–7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C–8

Page Boundaries

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Typefaces

Standard and Optional Typefaces

This appendix illustrates both standard and optional typefaces available with

IGP/PGL.

The standard fonts are Letter Gothic (#93779), OCR–A (#90993), and

OCR–B (#91409).

Beside each typeface is the 5–digit value required in the FACE # parameter

of the FONT command (page 4–61).

All other fonts are optional and can be purchased as part of one of the

Printronix Additional Font Diskettes. Some fonts are sold as packages; their

part numbers are in parentheses. Contact your Printronix representative for

further information.

D–1

Typefaces

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Albertus

92639

92640

92641

92642

Antique Olive

91119

91846

91118

91120

ITC Avant Garde Gothic

91059

91671

91060

91674

Monotype Baskerville

93884

93885

93886

93887

D–2

Typefaces

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ITC Benguiat

91331

91332

91335

91336

CG Bodoni

92581

92582

92585

92586

ITC Bookman

91454

91455

91467

91468

Decorative 1

91889

90249

93098

93099

D–3

Typefaces

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Decorative 2

Decorative 3

Decorative 4

Decorative 5

90326

90133

90349

90508

90369

92127

92129

91900

90775

91774

90774

90598

91311

94073

90241

91610

D–4

Typefaces

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Caslon

91988

91989

91990

91991

ITC Century

91654

91655

92195

92196

CG Century Schoolbook

92546

92547

92548

93812

ITC Cheltenham Book

91430

91431

91434

91435

D–5

Typefaces

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Clarendon

ITC Clearface

Courier

90271

90269

90572

90270

91571

91572

91577

91578

93950

93951

93952

93953

Futura

91810

91811

91816

91817

D–6

Typefaces

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ITC Galliard

92569

92570

92571

92572

Garamond Antiqua

91545

91546

91547

91548

Garth Graphic

91413

91414

91415

91416

Gill Sans

93872

93873

93874

93875

D–7

Typefaces

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CG Goudy Old Style

92542

92543

92544

92545

Hiroshige

93983

93984

93987

93988

ITC Korinna

91097

91313

91098

91314

Letter Gothic

93777

93778

93779

93780

D–8

Typefaces

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ITC Lubalin Graph

CG Melliza

Microstyle

OCR

92675

92623

92677

92625

92536

92537

92538

92539

90267

90268

90516

90460

90993

91409

D–9

Typefaces

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CG Omega

CG Palacio

Shannon

92506

92507

92510

92511

92532

92533

92534

92535

92133

92422

92424

92134

ITC Souvenir

90316

90332

90338

90339

D–10

Typefaces

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Stymie

ITC Tiepolo

ITC Tiffany

CG Times

90385

90386

90067

90068

93799

93800

93801

93802

90437

92628

90441

92630

92500

92501

92504

92505

D–11

Typefaces

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CG Trade

92519

92520

92522

92523

CG Triumvirate

92244

92245

92248

92249

CG Triumvirate Condensed

92246

92247

92250

92251

CG Trump Mediaeval

92557

92558

92559

92560

D–12

Typefaces

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Univers

94021

94022

94023

94024

Univers Condensed

ITC Zapf Chancery

ITC Zapf Dingbats

94029

94039

94030

94040

94018

93949

94019

94020

93848

D–13

Typefaces

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chart Printing Package (141783–008)

Seven Fonts

D–14

Typefaces

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chart Printing Package (141783–008)

D–15

Typefaces

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Desktop Printing Package (141783–010)

Eight Fonts

D–16

Typefaces

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Desktop Printing Package (141783–010)

D–17

Typefaces

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Label Printing Package #1 (141783–006)

Eight Fonts

D–18

Typefaces

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Label Printing Package #1 (141783–006)

D–19

Typefaces

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Label Printing Package #2 (141783–007)

Eight Fonts

D–20

Typefaces

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Label Printing Package #2 (141783–007)

D–21

Typefaces

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Office Printing Package (141783–009)

Eight Fonts

D–22

Typefaces

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Office Printing Package (141783–009)

D–23

Typefaces

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CG Century Schoolbook Family (141783–005)

Four Fonts

D–24

Typefaces

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CG Times Family (141783–004)

Four Fonts

D–25

Typefaces

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CG Triumverate Family (141783–003)

Four Fonts

D–26

Typefaces

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Garamond Family (141783–011)

Four Fonts

D–27

Typefaces

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Gill Sans Family (141783–002)

Five Fonts

D–28

Typefaces

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Gill Sans Family (141783–002)

D–29

Typefaces

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Univers Family (141783–001)

Four Fonts

D–30

Typefaces

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

duplicating incremental fields, 5–124

EAN 13, 5–60

Alphanumeric

data, 4–9

EAN 8, 5–53

errors, 8–18

duplicating incremental fields, 4–26

dynamic data, 6–28

execute dynamic data, 4–55

FIM, 5–67

errors, 8–8

I–2/5, 5–74

execute dynamic data, 4–54

execute overlay data, 4–59

increment fixed data, 4–22

incremental commands, 4–18

incremental dynamic data, 4–25, 4–57

printable character delimiter, 4–4

incremental dynamic data, 4–57, 5–123

incremental fields, 5–116

Interleaved 2/5, 5–74

MSI, 5–81

PDF–417, 5–88

POSTNET, 5–94

Alphanumeric Command, 4–12, 6–25

UPC–A, 5–100

Alphanumeric Data, 4–9

dynamic data, 4–9

fixed data, 4–9

UPC–E, 5–107

UPC–E0, 5–107

user–defined, 5–4

incremental data, 4–10

overlay data, 4–9

Bar Code Command, 6–28

Bar Code Overview

Code 128, 5–2

Code 128C, 5–2

Code 39, 5–2

Code UCC 128, 5–2

EAN 13, 5–2

EAN 8, 5–2

Alphanumeric data, 1–17

features, 1–3

ASCII Character Set, A–1

ASCII Table, 1–16

Auto Eject, 1–13

Auto Increment Example, 6–14

Auto Wrap, 1–13

FIM, 5–2

Interleaved 2/5, 5–2

MSI, 5–2

POSTNET, 5–3

UPC–A, 5–3

Bar Code, 5–2

UPC–E, 5–3

Codabar, 5–31

UPC–E0, 5–3

Code 128B, 5–38

Code 128C, 5–38

Code 39, 5–17

Bar codes, 1–3

Batch form processing, 1–4

Bits, packed, 4–7

Code 93, 5–24

Code UCC 128, 5–47

Bold Print. See Font

Index–1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Boundaries, page, C–1

Boundary Checking, 1–9

Box Command, 4–30

Box Errors, 8–5

Code UCC 128

command format, 5–49

structure, 5–47

Command Parameters, 4–5

Command Standards, 4–3

comments in command lines, 4–6

form name, 4–5

inline commands, 4–3

line terminator, 4–4

numeric values, 4–6

parameters, 4–5

Cassette Command. See Paper Command

Character Position Dot Position (CP.DP)

Format, 4–7

printable character, 4–4

prompt, 4–6

Character Set, ASCII, A–1

Character Set Chart, multinational, 7–11

semicolon, 4–3

Character Sets

accessing, 7–7

OCR, 7–6

SFCC, 4–3

spaces, 4–5

uppercase, 4–3

user–defined, 7–8

Commands

Character Sizes, PDF, 5–16

alphanumerics, 4–12, 6–25

Bar Code, 6–28

Characters

box, 4–30

height/width, 1–3

rotated, 1–3

Cassette. See Commands, Paper

Code 128B, 5–40

Codabar, 5–2, 5–31

Code 39, 5–19, 5–33

Code UCC 128, 5–49

comments in command line, 4–6

Compressed Print, 4–33

Configuration (CONFIG), 4–34

Corner, 4–36, 6–20

Code UCC 128, 5–47

Code 128, structure, 5–38

Code 128B, 5–38

command format, 5–40

example, 5–45

Create, 4–39

Code 128C, 5–38

Create Form Mode, 1–9, 1–10, 6–20

Create Logo, 4–74, 6–34

Delete, 6–48

example, 5–46, 5–52

Code 39, 5–17, 6–28

command format, 5–19, 5–33

example, 5–22, 5–37

structure, 5–17

Delete Form, 4–41

Delete Logo, 4–42

density, 4–33

Code 93, 5–2, 5–24

example, 5–30

Directory, 4–43, 6–47

Duplicating Incremental Alphanumerics,

4–26

structure, 5–24

Index–2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EAN 13, 5–62

Quiet, 4–84

Reset, 4–85

EAN 8, 5–55

Reverse Print, 4–86

Scale, 4–88

End, 4–48

Execute Dynamic Alphanumeric Data,

4–54

Select Format, 4–90

Setup, 4–91

Execute Dynamic Bar Code Data, 4–55

Execute Form Mode, 1–12, 6–21, 6–29

Execute Incremental Dynamic Data, 4–56

Expanded Print, 4–60

FIM, 5–70

TIFF Logo, 4–92

UPC–A, 5–102

UPC–E, 5–109

UPC–E0, 5–109

Vertical Duplication, 4–46, 6–43

Vertical Lines, 4–69, 6–23

Font, 4–61

Form Length, 4–64

Commands, placement of, 1–4

Comments, in command line, 4–6

Compressed Files, 4–7

Format, 4–3

Horizontal Duplication, 4–44

Horizontal Line, 6–23

Horizontal Lines, 4–67

I–2/5, 5–76

Compressed Print, 4–12

Compressed Print Command, 4–33

Configuration, menu, 2–3

Ignore Sequence (IGON/IGOFF), 4–65

Incremental Alphanumerics, 4–18

Incremental Alphanumerics Dynamic Data,

4–25

Configuration Command, 4–34

Configuration Mode, 1–13

auto eject, 1–13

auto wrap, 1–13

CR definition, 1–13

CR edit, 1–13

Incremental Alphanumerics Fixed Data,

4–22

Incremental Bar Code Fixed Data, 5–120

Incremental Dynamic Alphanumeric Data,

4–57

font select, 1–13

LF definition, 1–13

LPI, 1–13

Incremental Dynamic Bar Code Data, 4–57

line printer emulation, 4–71

Line Spacing, 4–66

margin select, 1–13

power on, 1–13

reset, 1–13

Listen, 4–71

Logo Call, 4–72

select SFCC, 1–13

skip prefix, 1–13

slew range, 1–13

uppercase, 1–13

MSI, 5–83

Normal Mode, 1–7, 1–8, 4–77

Page Number, 4–78

Paper, 4–79

Configuration Modes, ASCII conversion

table, 1–16

PCX Logo, 4–81

PDF417, 5–90

Control Character, 4–3

POSTNET, 5–97

Print File, 4–83

Conversion Table, ASCII, 1–16

Index–3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corner Command, 4–36, 6–20

Corner Errors, 8–6

Density, 4–12, 4–88

Density Command, 4–33

Design, form, 6–37

CP.DP Format, 4–7

Directory, 6–47

CR Code, define, 1–13

Directory Command, 4–43

Disable IGP (quiet command), 4–84

DISK Parameter, 4–6, 4–40

Double–strike Printing (DARK), 4–10

Duplicating Incremental Bar Codes, 5–124

Create Command, 4–39

Create Errors, 8–12

Create Form Command, 6–20

Create Form Mode, 1–9, 6–20

Create Form Mode Commands, 1–10

Create Logo Mode, 1–11, 4–74

Dynamic Alphanumeric Data, 4–9, 4–13,

6–28

Dynamic data, 1–17

Dark Printing, 4–10

line–matrix printers, 4–10

thermal printers, 4–10

EAN 13, 5–60

command format, 5–62

example, 5–66

Data

alphanumeric, 4–9

dynamic, 1–17

structure, 5–60

EAN 8, 5–53

fields, updating, 1–17

incremental, 1–17, 4–10

overlayed, 1–17

prepositioned, 1–17

storing, 4–6

command format, 5–55

example, 5–59

structure, 5–53

Eject, auto, 1–13

Elongated Characters, 4–12

Enable IGP (listen command), 4–71

End Command, 4–48

Data Bit 8, multinational character sets, 7–7

Debug Parameter, 4–39

Debugging Program Errors, 6–49

Debugging Programs, 8–2

Define CR Code, 1–13

Error Codes, 8–1

purpose, 8–2

Errors, 8–3

Define LF Code, 1–13

alphanumerics, 8–8

bar code, 8–18

box, 8–5

Delete, 6–48

Delete Form Command, 4–41

Delete Logo Command, 4–42

Delimiter, commands/parameter, 4–3

Delimiter, printable character, 4–4

corners, 8–6

create, 8–12

execute, 8–14

fonts, 8–24

Index–4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

horizontal line, 8–3

incremental fields, 8–22

logo, 8–10

Execute Incremental Dynamic Data, 4–56

Execute Overlay Data, 4–59

Expanded Print, 4–60

miscellaneous, 8–16

multinational character set, 8–23

reverse print, 8–21

vertical lines, 8–4

Features, 1–3

File, compression, 4–7

File formats, supported, 1–4

Errors, solving program, 6–49

Example Forms, 6–2

FIM, 5–67

Examples

command format, 5–70

example, 5–72

structure, 5–67

auto increment fields, 6–14

Create Logo, 6–32

delete, 6–48

Fixed Alphanumeric Data, 4–9

Fixed data, 1–17

directory, 6–47

dynamic data, 6–5

logo grid, B–3

Font Command, 4–61

Font Errors, 8–24

standard grid, B–1

using the Setup command, 6–5

Font, Select, 1–15

Execute, 4–51

Form Count, 4–52

Dynamic Alphanumerics, 4–52, 4–54

Dynamic Bar Codes, 4–52, 4–55

Incremental Dynamic Alphanumerics,

4–52

Form Design, 6–37

Form Layout, planning, 6–38

Form Length, 4–40

Incremental Dynamic Bar Codes, 4–52

Overlay Data, 4–53, 4–59

Form Length Command, 4–64

Form Name, 4–5, 4–39, 4–51

Format, commands, 4–3

Execute Dynamic Alphanumeric Data, 4–54

Execute Dynamic Bar Code Data, 4–55

Execute Errors, 8–14

Execute Form

German command format for I-2/5, 5–76

dynamic alphanumeric data, 4–54

dynamic bar code data, 4–55

general format, 4–51

German I–2/5, 5–74

Graphic capabilities, 1–3

incremental dynamic data, 4–56

overlay data, 4–59

Execute Form Command, 6–21

HDUP Command, 4–44

Execute Form Mode, 1–11, 4–49, 6–21, 6–29

Execute Form Mode Commands, 1–12

Horizontal Duplication Command, 4–44

Horizontal Line Command, 6–23

Index–5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Horizontal Line Errors, 8–3

Horizontal Lines Command, 4–67

HORZ Command, 4–67

Layout, page, 6–37

Left Margin Sign, 2–2

Host Form Length, 1–14

LF Code, define, 1–13

Limitations, page, 1–9, 4–64

Line Printer Emulation Commands, 4–71

Line Spacing, 4–66, 4–88

Line Spacing Command, 4–66

Line Terminator, commands/parameter, 4–4

Listen Command, 4–71

I–2/5, 5–74

command format, 5–76

example, 5–79

structure, 5–74

ICNT Parameter, 4–52, 4–56

idir parameter, 4–22, 4–57

Logo, 6–32

Create command, 6–34

creating, 6–32

Ignore Sequence Command (IGON/IGOFF),

4–65

define, 6–34, 6–38

delete, 6–48

IGON/IGOFF Command, 4–65

Increment Form Count Parameter, 4–52, 4–56

Increment Reset Parameter, 4–52, 4–56

Increment/decrement capability, 1–4

Incremental Alphanumeric Data, 4–10

Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data, 5–123

Incremental Bar Code Fields, 5–116

Incremental Bar Code Fixed Data, 5–120

Incremental data, 1–17

Logo Call Command, 4–72

Logo Errors, 8–10

Logo, delete command, 4–42

Logos, 1–4

LPI, 4–88

LPI Select, 1–15

Margin, Left Margin Sign, 2–2

Incremental Dynamic Bar Codes, 5–123

Incremental Fields Errors, 8–22

Incremental Fields Example, 6–14

Incrementing Alphanumeric Data, 4–18

Inline Commands, 4–3

Margins, page, C–1

Margins, setting, C–4, C–5

Maximum Print Area, C–3

Memory, 4–6

Memory Storage, 6–47

Menu, configuration, 2–3

Miscellaneous Errors, 8–16

Inline commands, 1–4

Interleaved 2/5, 5–74

IRST Parameter, 4–52, 4–56

Mode

ISET Command, 7–10

Create Form, 6–20

Create Logo, 6–32

Italic Print, 4–61

Index–6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Execute Form, 6–21, 6–29

Modes

Overstrike Data, 2–2

Create Logo, 4–74

Execute Form, 4–49

Normal, 4–77

Packed Bits, 4–7

Page Boundaries, 4–64, C–1

Page Layout Considerations, 6–37

Page Number Command, 4–78

Pagination, 4–51, 4–78

Modes of Operation

Configuration Mode, 1–13

Create Form, 1–9

Create Logo, 1–11

Execute Form, 1–11

Normal, 1–7

Paper Command, 4–79

cut, 4–79

Modes of operation, 1–7

eject, 4–79

intensity, 4–79

labels, 4–79

MSI, 5–81

command format, 5–83

example, 5–87

structure, 5–81

Paper Sizes, C–3

Paper speeds, 4–80

Multinational Character Set

charts, 7–11

Parameter Delimiter, 4–3

Parentheses (Command Standard), 4–5

PCX capability, 1–4

features, 7–2

OCR character sets, 7–6

user–defined sets, 7–8

PDF Character Sizes, 5–16

PDF–417, 5–88

example, 5–93

structure, 5–88

Multinational Character Set Errors, 8–23

Multinational Character Sets

data bit 8, 7–7

PDF417, command format, 5–90

Placement of data, 1–17

Point Size, 4–61

ISET command, 7–10

power–up selection, 7–7

POSTNET, 5–94

command format, 5–97

structure, 5–94

Normal Mode, 1–7, 4–77

Numeric Values, used in command format,

4–6

Power On IGP/PGL, 1–14

Power–Up Character Set Selection,

multinational character sets, 7–7

Prepositioned data, 1–17

Print Boundaries, 1–9, 4–64

Print File Command, 4–83

Print, reversed, 1–4

OCR Character Sets, 7–6

Overlay Alphanumeric Data, 4–9

Overlay data, 1–17

Index–7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printable Character, 4–4

Printable Character Delimiter, 4–4

Prompt, 4–6

Space, used in command format, 4–5

Special Function Control Character (SFCC),

4–3

STARTDATA Parameter, 4–23, 4–58, 5–121

STEPMASK Parameter, 4–22, 4–57, 5–120

Storing Data, 4–6

Quiet Command, 4–84

Symbol Set. See Configuration, ISET, USET

Symset, 4–61

Repeat Count Parameter, 4–22, 4–58, 5–120

Terminator, line, 4–4

TIFF capability, 1–4

Typefaces, D–1

Reset Command, 4–85

Reset Count Parameter, 4–23, 4–58, 5–121

Return, carriage, 2–2

Reverse Print, 4–12

Reverse Print Command, 4–86

Reverse Print Errors, 8–21

Reversed print, 1–4

UC Parameter, 4–14

UPC–A, 5–100

Rotate, 4–80

command format, 5–102

example, 5–106

Rotated Characters, 4–13

Rotated data, 1–3

structure, 5–100

UPC–E, 5–107

RPT Parameter, 4–22, 4–58, 5–120

RST Parameter, 4–23, 4–58, 5–121

command format, 5–109

example, 5–115

structure, 5–107

UPC–E0, 5–107

command format, 5–109

example, 5–115

Scale Command, 4–88

Select Format Command, 4–90

Semicolon, 4–3

structure, 5–107

Updating data fields, 1–17

Uppercase, 4–3

SETUP Command, 4–91

SFCC, 4–3

Uppercase Parameter, 4–14

User–Defined, bar code, 5–4

SFCC Select, 1–14

SFON/SFOFF Command, 4–90

Sign, Left Margin Sign, 2–2

Skip Cmd Prefix, 1–15

Slant (italic) Print, 4–61

User–Defined Barcode, variable ratio size

(D), 5–4

User–Defined Character Sets, multinational,

7–8

Index–8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USET Command, 7–8

Variable Ratio Size (D), user–defined bar

code, 5–4

VDUP Command, 4–46

VERT Command, 4–69

Vertical Duplication Command, 4–46, 6–43

Vertical Line Errors, 8–4

Vertical Lines Command, 4–69, 6–23

Index–9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index–10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PRINTRONIX

17500 CARTWRIGHT ROAD

P.O. BOX 19559

IRVINE, CA. 92713-9559

PHONE: 714/863-1900

FAX: 714/660-8682

PRINTRONIX

NEDERLAND BV

P.O. BOX 163, NIEUWEWEG 283

NL-6600 AD WIJCHEN

THE NETHERLANDS

PHONE: (31) 24 6489489

FAX: (31) 24 6489499

PRINTRONIX

A.G.

512 CHAI CHEE LANE, HEX 02-15

BEDOK INDUSTRIAL ESTATE

SINGAPORE 1646

PHONE: (65) 449-7555

FAX: (65) 449-7553

136458–001B

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pfaff Sewing Machine 489 User Manual
Philips Iron GC3500 User Manual
Philips Universal Remote SBC RU 538 00 User Manual
Pioneer CD Player DRM 1004 User Manual
Planet Technology Automobile Accessories GST 70X User Manual
Planet Technology Security Camera CAM IR552 User Manual
Polaroid Portable Multimedia Player PMP431 4 User Manual
Printronix Printer ThermaLine Series User Manual
PYLE Audio Car Video System PLD70BT User Manual
PYLE Audio Projector PRJSD188 User Manual